Clubman (2021) - Automotive MINI - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Automobile (Estate/Wagon)
Brand	MINI
Model	Clubman (2021)
Overall Length	4,253 mm (167.4 in)
Overall Width (with mirrors)	2,040 mm (80.3 in)
Overall Height	1,441 mm (56.7 in)
Wheelbase	2,670 mm (105.1 in)
Curb Weight	1,425 – 1,585 kg (3,142 – 3,494 lb)
Fuel Type	Petrol or Diesel
Engine Options	1.5L 3-cylinder petrol, 2.0L 4-cylinder petrol, 2.0L diesel
Transmission	6-speed manual or 7-speed/8-speed automatic
Seating Capacity	5
Cargo Volume (rear seats up)	360 L (12.7 cu ft)
Cargo Volume (rear seats folded)	1,250 L (44.1 cu ft)
Fuel Consumption (combined, petrol 1.5L)	5.9 – 6.5 L/100 km (36 – 40 mpg US)
Top Speed	205 – 238 km/h (127 – 148 mph) depending on engine
0-100 km/h (0-62 mph)	7.2 – 9.1 seconds
Safety Features	ABS, ESC, airbags (front, side, curtain), TPMS, rearview camera
Infotainment System	8.8-inch touchscreen, navigation, Apple CarPlay, Android Auto
Maintenance Interval	Every 15,000 km (9,300 mi) or 1 year, whichever comes first
Cleaning Instructions	Wash with mild soap and water; avoid abrasive cleaners; interior vacuum and wipe with damp cloth
Security Features	Alarm system, remote keyless entry, immobilizer
Spare Parts Availability	Genuine MINI parts at authorized dealers; aftermarket options available

Frequently Asked Questions - Clubman (2021) MINI

What type of fuel does the 2021 MINI Clubman use?

The 2021 MINI Clubman is available with petrol or diesel engines. Refer to the fuel cap for the recommended octane rating.

How often should I change the oil?

MINI recommends an oil change every 15,000 km (9,300 mi) or 1 year, whichever comes first. Use fully synthetic oil meeting spec LL-14 or LL-17.

What is the cargo capacity with seats folded?

With the rear seats folded, the 2021 Clubman offers 1,250 liters (44.1 cu ft) of cargo space. The split-folding seats allow flexible loading.

Does the Clubman have Apple CarPlay and Android Auto?

Yes, the Clubman's infotainment system includes Apple CarPlay and Android Auto compatibility via USB connection.

How do I reset the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)?

After adjusting tire pressures, drive for a few minutes at speeds above 20 km/h. The TPMS will automatically reset. For manual reset, refer to the vehicle settings in the infotainment menu.

What is the recommended tire pressure?

The recommended tire pressure varies by load and wheel size. It is listed on a sticker inside the driver's door pillar. Typical pressures are 2.2 – 2.5 bar (32 – 36 psi).

How can I pair my phone via Bluetooth?

Enable Bluetooth on your phone, then on the infotainment screen go to Settings > Bluetooth. Select 'Add new device' and choose your phone from the list. Confirm the pairing code.

What is the towing capacity?

The 2021 MINI Clubman can tow up to 1,400 kg (3,086 lb) when properly equipped with a tow bar. Check the owner's manual for detailed towing guidelines.

Are there any known issues with the 2021 Clubman?

Some owners have reported minor infotainment glitches and excessive oil consumption in early models. Consult your dealer for software updates and monitoring.

Where can I download the full owner's manual?

You can download the official owner's manual in PDF from the MINI website or from our platform notice-facile.com. It contains detailed instructions and specifications.

USER MANUAL Clubman (2021) MINI

LINK: CONTENT & A-Z CLUSMAN COOPER HOLD COOPER

OWNER'S MANUAL.

MINI CLUBMAN.

Stylized green tree-shaped umbrella placed on a burlap sack against a plain wall (no text or symbols)

WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI CLUBMAN.

Thank you for choosing a MINI.

The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI.

Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

NOTES

Information....8

QUICK REFERENCE

Entering....16

Set-up and use....20

On the road....23

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit....32

Central Information Display (CID)....36

General settings....42

Owner's Manual media....51

CONTROLS

Opening and closing....52

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel....71

Transporting children safely....82

Driving....88

Displays....113

Lights....129

Safety....135

Driving stability control systems....155

Driving comfort.... 160

Climate control....180

Interior equipment....189

Storage compartments....197

Cargo area....201

i DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving....208

Reducing fuel consumption....213

ENTERTAINMENT

General information.... 220

Tone....222

Radio....224

Audio....232

COMMUNICATION

Telephone....236

MINI Connected....240

MOBILITY

Refueling....244

Fuel....246

Wheels and tires....248

Engine compartment....269

Engine oil....272

Coolant....276

Maintenance....278

Replacing components.... 280

Breakdown assistance....290

Care....299

REFERENCE

Technical data.... 304

Appendix....307

License Texts and Certifications....308

Everything from A to Z....316

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English ID5 II/20, 03 20 490

Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Information

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation

The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Additional sources of information

Service center

A service center will be glad to answer questions at any time.

Internet

Vehicle information and general information on MINI, e.g., on technology, are available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.

MINI Motorer's Guide app

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app for iOS or Android in the respective Store.

MINI Motorer's Guide Web

Driver's Guide Web shows the most suitable information for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually installed in the vehicle will be explained. Driver's Guide Web can be displayed in any current browser.

Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Sym- Meaning bol

Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

"..." Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

Action steps

Action steps to be carried out are presented as a numbered list. The steps must be carried out in the defined order.

1. First action step.

2. Second action step.

Enumerations

Enumerations without mandatory order or alternative possibilities are presented as a list with bullet points.

- First possibility.

- Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components

This symbol on a vehicle component indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates features and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example because of the selected optional features or the country-specific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Your dealer's service center is happy to answer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic information

The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

Manufacturer

The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.

Intended use

Heed the following when using the vehicle:

- Owner's Manual.

- Information on the vehicle. Do not remove stickers.

- Technical vehicle data.

- The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the vehicle is driven.

– Vehicle documents and statutory documents.

Warranty

Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operating conditions and registration requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with

the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information on warranty is available from a service center.

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, for instance the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to a MINI dealer's service center. If you choose to use another service facility, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use of a facility that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair, according to MINI specifications with properly trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for instance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent damage and related safety risks.

Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of components, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result in a safety risk.

Parts and accessories

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of parts and accessory products approved by the manufacturer of the MINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants genuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California, the law requires vehicle manufacturers to provide the following warning:

Warning

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

Warning

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the following warranties:

• New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
• Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
• Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
  – California Emission Control System Limited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region,

you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance

Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for maintenance measures:

• MINI Maintenance system.
• Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models.
• Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly maintained, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refer to chapter engine oil change regarding recommended service intervals for oil changes.

Data memory

General information

Electronic control devices are installed in the vehicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance during driving, for instance driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged data can be requested from the manufacturer of

the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for example.

Personal reference

Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehicle identification number, license plate and corresponding authorities. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, for instance via utilized services.

Operating data in the vehicle

Control units process data to operate the vehicle.

For example, this includes:

- Status messages for the vehicle and its individual components, e.g., wheel rotational speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.

- Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in the vehicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not stored beyond the operating period.

Electronic components, e.g. control units and ignition keys, contain components for storing technical information. Information about the vehicle condition, component usage, maintenance requirements events or faults can be stored temporarily or permanently.

This information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system, or the environment, for instance:

- Operating states of system components, for instance, fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery status.

• Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes.
• Responses by the vehicle to special situations such as airbag deployment or engagement of the driving stability control systems.
• Information on vehicle-damaging events.

The data is required to perform the control unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.

The majority of this data is volatile and is only processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small share of the data is stored event-related in event or fault memories.

When servicing, for instance during repairs, service processes, warranty cases, and quality assurance measures, this technical information can be read out from the vehicle together with the vehicle identification number.

A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can read out the information. The socket for OBD On-board Diagnosis required by law in the vehicle is used to read out the data.

The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical conditions of the vehicle, helps with the identification of the fault, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement.

Furthermore, the manufacturer has product monitoring duties to meet in line with product liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle manufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle can also be used to check customer claims for warranty and guaranty.

Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be reset when a dealer's service center or

another qualified service center or repair shop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort and individual settings can be stored in the vehicle and modified or reset at any time.

For example, this includes:

• Settings for the seat and steering wheel positions.

• Suspension and climate control settings.
  If necessary, data can be transferred to the entertainment and communication system of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
  This includes the following depending on the respective equipment:

• Multimedia data such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system.

• Address book data for use in conjunction with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system.
• Entered navigation destinations.
• Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been connected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time.

This data is only transmitted to third parties upon personal request as part of the use of online services. The transmission depends on the selected settings for the use of the services.

Incorporation of mobile devices

Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile devices connected to the vehicle, for instance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements.

The sound and picture from the mobile device can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain information is transferred to the mobile device at the same time. Depending on the type of incorporation, this includes, for instance position data and other general vehicle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance navigation or music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between the mobile device and the vehicle, such as active access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings depends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General information

If the vehicle has a wireless network connection, this enables data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These include online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehicle manufacturer

Where online services from the vehicle manufacturer are concerned, the corresponding functions are described in the ap-

propriate place, for instance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The relevant legal information pertaining to data protection is provided there too. Personal data may be used to perform online services. Data is exchanged over a secure connection, for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of personal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual arrangement or consent. It is also possible to activate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. That is, with the exception of functions and services required by law such as Assist systems.

Services from other providers

When using online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the relevant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this process. Information on the way in which personal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be obtained from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened.
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, for instance name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification number

Engine compartment

Close-up of a mechanical component with a central circular dial and surrounding wiring (no visible text or symbols)

The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Windshield

Close-up of a car's front wheel and side panel, showing no visible text or symbols

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box

1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone [phone].

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline [phone]. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Entering

Opening and closing

Buttons on the vehicle key

1 2 3 4

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Open split doors

4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, either only the driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central locking system

Overview

Close-up of a car dashboard knob showing the number 6 and weight (no text or symbols beyond basic design)

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehicle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Comfort Access

Concept

The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

Simple diagram of a hand holding a circular object with an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols)

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Locking the vehicle

Simple diagram of a pen-like object with an arrow pointing to it, set against a dark gradient background (no text or symbols)

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Opening the split doors with no-touch activation

Concept

The split doors can be opened with no-touch activation using the vehicle key you are carrying.

Performing the foot movement

1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at approx. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction of travel and immediately pull it back.

Close-up of a person's lower body and arm with sensor waves on the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Split Doors

Opening

Diagram of a car's front bumper with numbered arrows indicating parts of the lid and nose.

- Unlock the vehicle and use the button in the handle to completely open first the right side, arrow 1, and then the left side of the split doors, arrow 2.

- Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second to open the right side of the split doors.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key again for approx. 1 second to open the left side of the split doors.

Depending on the setting, the doors may be unlocked.

Closing

Closing the split doors manually.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

Car interior diagram with numbered labels pointing to the dashboard and steering wheel

1 Low beams, fog lights
2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal
3 Instrument cluster
4 Wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster

The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Driver's door

1 2 3

1 Safety switch
2 Power windows
3 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 2 3

1 Selector lever
2 Controller with buttons
3 Parking brake

Central Information Display (CID)

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

MENU	Press once: calls up the main menu.
	Press twice: open recently used menus.
BACK	Opens the previous display.
OPTION	Opens the Options menu.
AUDIO	Open the Audio menu.
TEL	Opens the Phone menu.

Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 2 3 4

1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt

Electrically adjustable seats

1 4 3 2

1 Memory function
2 Lumbar support
3 Backrest tilt
4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Adjusting the head restraint

Height

Interior view of a car showing a white vehicle headrest with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

• To raise: push the head restraint up.
• To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 2 3

1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out

Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

Close-up of a car interior showing the steering wheel, dashboard, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.

Memory function

Concept

The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function:

• Seat position.
• Exterior mirror position.

Storing

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3. SET the button. The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on the seat while the LED is illuminated. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings

The stored position is called up automatically.

Press the desired button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed.

Once underway, adjustment of the seat position on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.

Infotainment

Radio

Control elements

1 2 3 4 BAND MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 5

1 Changing the waveband
2 Changing the entertainment source
3 Sound output on/off, volume
4 Changing the station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons

Pairing the mobile phone

After the mobile phone is paired once with the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using the Central Information Display (CID), the steering wheel buttons and spoken instructions.

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"
   The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display.

5. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's manual: e.g., search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

1. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

- Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

- Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

The mobile phone is connected and will appear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the phone

Accepting a call

Incoming call can be accepted via the Central Information Display (CID) or the button on the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press the button.

Dialing a number

1. "Communication"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the numbers individually.

4. Select the symbol.

On the road

Driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition on/off

- On: press the Start/Stop button.

Most of the indicator/ warning lights light up for a varied length of time.

• Off: press the Start/Stop button again. All indicator lights go out.
• Radio-ready state: when the ignition is switched off, press the ON/OFF button on the radio or when the engine is running, press the Start/Stop button. Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation.

Start/stop engine

Steptronic transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Steptronic transmission: switching off

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake.

2. Engage selector lever position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: switching off

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Steptronic transmission: switches the engine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. The engine starts automatically when the brake pedal is released.

Manual transmission: switches the engine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is depressed, the engine starts automatically.

Parking brake

Setting

Pull the switch when the vehicle is stationary.

The LED and indicator light light up.

Releasing

Manual transmission: press the switch while the brake pedal is pressed.

Steptronic transmission: press the switch while the brake is pressed or selector lever position P is set.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Manual transmission

Shifting

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push the gearshift lever to the right in order to prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gear-shift lever dynamically to the left and engage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positions

Parking position P.

R is reverse.

Neutral N.

Drive mode D.

Engage selector lever position P or R only when the vehicle is stationary.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Selector lever lock

A lock prevents an inadvertent change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position and, depending on the transmission version, inadvertent switching to selector lever position P or R.

To release the lock: with the brake pedal depressed, press the button on the front or side of the selector lever.

Steptronic transmission, Sport and manual mode

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

Sport program:

Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D.

Manual mode:

- To shift down: press the selector lever forward.

- To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.

High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal, roadside parking light

High beams, headlight flasher

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating left and right controls (no text or symbols)

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

- High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.

- High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Turn signal

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle's seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

• On: press the lever past the resistance point.
• Off: lightly tap the lever to the resistance point.
• Off: press the lever past the resistance point in the opposite direction.
• Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down.
• Brief signaling: press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Canada: roadside parking light

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle's left-hand side with bidirectional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols present)

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

• On: with the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.
• Off: briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Light functions

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Car interior control panel with numbered directional arrows indicating vehicle movement or system flow

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

- Resting position of the wipers: position 0.

• Rain sensor: position 1.
• Normal wiper speed: position 2.
• Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Brief wipe and switching off

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted cylindrical component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Press the lever down.

• Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.
• Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

Car interior control panel with numbered directional arrows indicating vehicle positions or movement

To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, air vent, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point.

• Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
• Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

Brief wipe and switching off

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted cylindrical component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Press the lever down.

• To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
• To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
• Brief wipe: press down once.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

Interior view of a car dashboard with a USB cable inserted, showing no visible text or symbols

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating traffic flow (no text or symbols visible)

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air vent (no visible text or symbols)

Pull the lever.

Climate control

Air conditioner

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Recirculated-air mode.

Button Function

Controls the air flow, manual.

Controls the air distribution manually.

Windshield defroster.

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO program.

Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/recirculated-air mode.

Controls the air flow, manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Defrosts and defogs the windows.

Button Function

Windshield defroster.

Rear window defroster.

Refueling stop

Refueling

Fuel cap

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.

Close-up of a car's side panel with a white circular arrow icon pointing left (no text or symbols)

1. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

2. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Gasoline

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without metallic additives.

Information on the recommended fuel grade can be found in the Owner's Manual.

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the door and seat, with no visible text or symbols.

The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed:

- At least twice a month.

- Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Electronic oil measurement

Requirements

A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil level

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

Adding engine oil

General information

Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle before engine oil is added.

Adding engine oil

Close-up of a circular mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to it, no visible text or symbols.

Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Observe the quantity to be added in the message.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Observe recommended engine oil types.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and digital display (no visible text or symbols)

The button is located above the Control Display.

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside Assistance

This service can be reached around the clock in many countries.

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the MINI Roadside Assistance is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 Power windows 66

2 Exterior mirror operation 79

3 Buttons of the central locking system 57

4 Lights

Front fog lights 132

Light switch 129

Lights off

Daytime running lights 131

Parking lights 129

Low beams 129

Automatic headlight control 130

Cornering light 131

High-beam Assistant 131

Instrument lighting 133

5 Steering wheel buttons, left

Camera-based cruise control on/off 160

Cruise control on/off 167

Cruise control: to store the speed

Pausing, continuing cruise control

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

Camera-based cruise control: reduce distance

Camera-based cruise control: increase distance

6 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 95

High beams, head-light flasher 95

High-beam Assistant 131

Roadside parking lights 130

Onboard Computer 123

7 Instrument cluster 113

8 Steering column stalk, right

Wipers 96

Wiper on Canadian models 100

Rain sensor 97

Rain sensor on Canadian models 100

Cleaning windows 98

Rear window wiper in Canadian models 98

Rear window wiper 98

Clean the rear window 98

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Telephone 236

Confirm the selection 123

Selection back 123

Selection next 123

Increase volume

Reduce volume

10

Horn, entire surface

11 Adjusting the steering wheel 81

12 Unlocking the hood 270

In the vicinity of the center console

Interior view of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification and function

1 Hazard warning system 290

Intelligent Safety 146

2 Control Display 36
3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 197
5 Climate control 180

6 PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 169

Rearview camera 172

Parking assistant 175

Auto Start/Stop function 91

Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 88

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 155

MINI Driving Modes switch 157

7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 105

Manual transmission gearshift lever 104

8 Controller with buttons 39

9 Parking brake 93

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 SOS 2 PASS AIR RAG OFF 3 6 5 4 3

1 Emergency Request, SOS 291

4 Ambient light 133

2 Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbag 138

5 Panoramic glass sunroof 68

3 Reading lights 133

6 Interior lights 133

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Input and display

Letters and numbers

Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering upper and lower case letters, numbers and characters:

Symbol Function

abcABC	Change between capital and lower-case letters.
Insert blank space.
Use voice activation.
OK Confirm entry.

Without navigation system

@A Aa Select the symbol.

Entry comparison

When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automatically.

Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle.

Only those letters are offered during entry for which data is available.

Activating/deactivating the functions

Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

Function is activated.
☐ Function is deactivated.

Status information

General information

The status field can be found in the upper area of the Control Display. Status information is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Symbol Meaning

HD) HD Radio station is being received.

sxm Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular net- work. Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Symbol Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Other symbols

Symbol Meaning

⚠️ Check Control message.

The sound output has been switched off.

- Checking the current vehicle position.

Control elements

Overview

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing key components (no visible text or symbols)

1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons

Control Display

General information

To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions, refer to page 302.

In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to intense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for instance through shade or air conditioning, the normal functions are restored.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in the area in the front of the Control Display can shift and damage the Control Display. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automatically

The Control Display is switched on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the Control Display is needed for operation.

In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.

Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off manually.

1. Press the button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on the Controller to switch it back on again.

Controller with navigation system

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.

Operation

- Turn to switch between menu items, for example.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a central cylindrical housing and curved arms (no visible text or symbols)

- Press to select a menu item, for example.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a downward arrow indicating a process or operation (no text or symbols visible)

- Tilt in four directions to switch between displays, for example.

Close-up of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: calls up the main menu.

Press twice: open recently used menus.

Opens the Communication menu.

Opens the Media/Radio menu.

Button Function

NAV	Opens destination input menu for navigation.
MAP	Opens navigation map.
BACK	Opens the previous display.
OPTION	Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.

Operation

- Turn to switch between menu items, for example.

Close-up of a mechanical knob with directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

- Press to select a menu item, for example.

Close-up of a mechanical control knob with a white arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols visible)

- Tilt in two directions to switch between displays, for example.

Close-up of a mechanical control knob with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

	Press once: calls up the main menu.
	Press twice: open recently used menus.
	Opens the previous display.
	Opens the Options menu.
	Open the Audio menu.
	Opens the Phone menu.

Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menu

Press the button.

Circular icon set with a car, globe, email, phone, car, and music symbols (no text or numbers)

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

Circular icon set with a car, globe, email, phone, music note, and car symbol (no text or numbers)

1. Press the Controller.

Adjusting menu contents

The display of menus "Media/Radio", "Communication" and "MINI Connected" can be adjusted, for instance to remove the entries of functions that are not used from the menu.

Via Central Information Display (CID):

1. Select the menu.

2. "Personalize menu"

3. Select desired menu contents to be displayed.

Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, for instance "System settings", a new display appears.

- Move the Controller to the left.

The current display closes and the previous display is shown.

- Press the button.

The previous display re-opens.

- Move the Controller to the right.

The new display opens.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Opening recently used menus

The recently used menus can be displayed.

Press the button twice.

Opening the Options menu

Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The menu consists of various areas, for instance:

- "Media/Radio": control options for the selected main menu.

- "Save station": if applicable, further control options for the selected menu.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.

2. OK confirm entry.

Deleting

Symbol Function

Press the

Controller: delete letters or number.

or

ABC

Hold the Controller down: delete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.

All letters for which there are entries are displayed on the left edge.

1. Select the first letter of the desired entry.

The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.

Programmable memory buttons

General information

The Central Information Display (CID) functions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, for instance radio stations, phone numbers, and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Storing a function

1. Select the function via the Central Information Display (CID).

2. Press and hold the desired button, until a signal sounds.

Executing a function

Press the button.

The function will work immediately.

This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the Control Display.

Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

General settings

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Language

Setting the language

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Time

Setting the time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"

4. "Time:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed.

6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.

Setting the time format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Date

Setting the date

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.

Setting the date format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the units of measurement

You can set the units of measurement for some values, for example, consumption, distances and temperature.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Activating/deactivating the display of the current vehicle position

Concept

If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current vehicle position can be displayed in the MINI Connected app.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating popup windows

For some functions, popup windows are displayed automatically on the Control Display. Some of these popup windows can be activated or deactivated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Control Display

Brightness

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Depending on the light conditions, the brightness settings may not be clearly visible.

Screensaver

If no entries are made via the Central Information Display (CID), a screensaver can be displayed after an adjustable time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Select the desired setting.

2. "My MINI"

3. "System settings"
4. "Displays"
5. "Control display"
6. "Screensaver"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Messages

Concept

The menu centrally displays all messages arriving in the vehicle in list form.

General information

The following messages can be displayed:

• Traffic messages.
• Check Control messages.
• Messages on service notifications.
• Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.

Messages are additionally displayed in the status field.

Retrieving messages

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.

The menu in which the message is displayed will open.

Deleting messages

All messages, except Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can be deleted from the list.

Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as they are relevant.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

3. Press the button.

4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications"

Adjusting

The following settings can be adjusted:

• Select the applications, from which messages will be permitted.
• Sort the messages according to date or priority.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.

Data protection

Data transfer

Concept

The vehicle offers various functions which require data to be transferred to MINI or a service provider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some functions.

General information

With data transfer deactivated, the respective function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activating/deactivating

Follow the instructions on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Concept

Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores personal data, such as stored radio stations. This personal data can be permanently deleted via the Central Information Display (CID).

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data is deleted:

• Driver profile settings.
• Stored radio stations.

• Stored programmable memory buttons.

• Travel and Onboard Computer information.

• Phone book.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes.

Functional requirement

Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data

Note and follow the instructions on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "OK"
7. Exit and lock the vehicle.

The deletion process takes 15 minutes to complete.

If not all data was deleted, repeat the deletion.

Canceling deletion

Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.

Connections

Concept

Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function.

General information

The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types for them. The scope of functions depends on the mobile device.

Function Connec- tion type
Making calls via the hands-free system.	Bluetooth.
Using phone functions via the Central Information Dis-play (CID).
Playing music from the smartphone or the audio player.	Bluetooth or USB.
USB storage device:	USB.
Playing music.

The following connection types require one-time pairing with the vehicle:

- Bluetooth.

Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General information

Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number

When looking for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number.

These numbers can be displayed in the vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements

• Compatible device, refer to page 46, with Bluetooth interface.
• The vehicle key is in the vehicle.
• The device is ready for operation.
• Bluetooth is activated on the device and in the vehicle, refer to page 46.
• Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may be required on the device; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Switching on Bluetooth

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"

5. "Bluetooth®"

Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the device will be used:

6. "Telephone"

7. "Bluetooth® audio"

The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display.

1. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

1. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

- Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

- Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

If connection was not successful: Frequently Asked Questions, refer to page 47.

Frequently Asked Questions

All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can help:

Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected?

- There are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehicle.

In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections with other devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the mobile phone and start a new device search.

- The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life.

Charge the mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer react?

- The applications on the mobile phone do not function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and on again.

- Possibly too high or too low ambient temperatures for mobile phone operation.

Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used via the Central Information Display (CID)?

- The mobile phone may not be properly configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the telephone function.

Why are no or not all phone book entries displayed or why are they incomplete?

- Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete.

- It is possible that only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

- It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

- It may not be possible to transmit contacts from social networks.

- The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

– Data volume of the contact too large, for instance due to stored information such as notes.

Reduce the data volume of the contact.

- A mobile phone is only connected as an audio source.

Reconfigure the mobile phone and connect it with the telephone function.

How can the phone connection quality be improved?

- The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, contact the hotline, a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

USB connection

General information

The following mobile devices can be connected to the USB port:

- Mobile phones.

- Audio devices with USB port, for instance MP3 players.

- USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.

A connected USB storage device will be supplied with charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. Follow the maximum charge current of the USB port.

USB ports with data transfer can be used to play the music files via USB Audio.

Follow the following when connecting:

- Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB port.

- Use a flexible adapter cable.

- Protect the USB storage device against mechanical damage.

- Due to the large number of USB storage devices available on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device is operable on the vehicle.

- Do not expose USB storage devices to extreme environmental conditions, such as very high temperatures; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

- Due to the many different compression techniques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB storage device cannot be guaranteed in all cases.

- To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB storage device via the onboard socket, when it is connected to the USB port.

- Depending on how the USB storage device is being used, settings may be required on the USB storage device, refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB media:

- USB hard drives.

- USB hubs.

- USB memory card readers with multiple slots.

- HFS-formatted or NTFS-formatted USB storage devices.

- Devices such as fans or lamps.

Functional requirement

Compatible device, refer to page 46, with USB port.

Connecting the device

Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter cable to a USB port, refer to page 195.

The USB device is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

Managing mobile devices

General information

• After one-time pairing, the devices are automatically recognized and reconnected when the ignition is switched on.
• The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone is transferred to the vehicle after recognition.
• For some devices, certain settings may be necessary, for instance authorization, see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device list

All devices paired and/or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

A symbol indicates, for which function a device is used.

Symbol Function

"Telephone"

"Bluetooth® audio"

Configuring the device

Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.

If a function is assigned to a device, the function will be deactivated where appropriate for a device that is already connected and the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the device

The device's connection to the vehicle is disconnected.

The device remains paired and can be connected again, refer to page 49.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the device

A disconnected device can be reconnected. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the device before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The functions may be deactivated on a device already connected.

Deleting the device

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removed from the device list.

Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

You can use the following media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual:

- Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 51.

Printed Owner's Manual

Concept

The printed Owner's Manual describes all standard, country-specific, and optional features offered with the series.

General information

The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication can be obtained as a printed book from the service center.

Supplementary Owner's Manuals

Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition to the onboard literature.

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Vehicle key

General information

The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle keys with integrated key.

Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 55.

Depending on the equipment and country version, various settings, refer to page 63, can be configured for the button functions.

A personal driver profile, refer to page 62, for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.

To provide information on maintenance requirements, the service data is stored in the vehicle key, refer to page 278.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

1 2 3 4

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Open split doors

4 Panic mode

Unlocking

Press the button on the vehicle key.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 63, the following access points are unlocked.

- Driver's door and fuel filler flap. Press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

- All doors, the split doors, and fuel filler flap.

In addition, the following functions are executed:

- Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 63.

- The settings stored in the driver profile, refer to page 62, are applied.

- The driver's seat is set to the last position saved in the driver's profile. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 63.

- The interior lights, refer to page 133, and the MINI logo projection are switched on, provided that the interior lights were not switched off manually.

- Depending on the settings, the welcome light and pathway lighting, refer to page 130, are switched on.

- Exterior mirrors folded through convenient closing are folded open.

- The alarm system, refer to page 64, is switched off.

The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

Convenient opening

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after unlocking.

The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Locking

1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

The following functions are executed:

- All doors, the split doors, and the fuel filler flap are locked.

- Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 63.

- The alarm system, refer to page 64, is switched on.

If the engine or ignition is still switched on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.

With Comfort Access: convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key in the area close to the vehicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof are closed, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Switch on interior lights and courtesy light

Press the button on the vehicle key with the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switched on.

These functions are not available if the interior lights were switched off manually.

The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing the button again.

Split Doors

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the split doors can be opened with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 63.

When the trailer socket is in use, the split doors cannot be opened with the vehicle key or with the button in the car's interior.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the split doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the split doors is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The split doors swivel back and to the side when they open. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the split doors is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening

1. Press the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second. The right side of the split doors opens.

2. Press the button on the vehicle key again for approx. 1 second.

The left side of the split doors opens.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

- Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

- Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Replacing the battery

1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle key, refer to page 57.
2. Slide the integrated key into the opening and raise the cover. The battery compartment is accessible.

3D rendered illustration of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover.

Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical component with a handle and internal structure (no text or symbols)

1. Push battery in the direction of the arrow using a pointed object and lift it out.

3D rendered mechanical component with a white arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols present)

1. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the positive side facing up.
2. Insert lid and cover.
3. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair

shop or take them to a collection point.

Additional vehicle keys

Additional vehicle keys are available from a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of vehicle keys

A lost vehicle key can be blocked and replaced by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Malfunction

General information

A Check Control message is displayed. Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:

- The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 55.

- Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

- Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects.

- Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key together with electronic devices.

- Interference of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 56.

Starting the engine via emergency detection of the Vehicle key

Close-up of a car interior showing a steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

It is not possible to start the engine if the vehicle key has not been detected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark on the steering column as shown. Pay attention to the display in the instrument cluster.

2. If the vehicle key is detected:

Start the engine within 10 seconds.

If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure.

Frequently Asked Questions

What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in vehicle key?

- The options provided by the Remote Services of the MINI Connected app include the ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.

This requires an active MINI Connected contract and the MINI Connected app must be installed on a smartphone.

- Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the MINI Connected Call Center.

An active MINI Connected contract is required.

Integrated key

General information

The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without the vehicle key using the integrated key.

Safety information

Warning

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.

Removing

1 MINI 2

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the door lock

1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid.

Close-up of a black cylindrical object with a white arrow pointing to it, against a dark gradient background (no text or symbols)

1. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm system

The alarm system is not switched on if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key. The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the door lock.

Buttons for the central locking system

General information

In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Overview

Close-up of a car dashboard knob showing the number 6 and a half-circle dial (no text or symbols beyond the dial)

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Press the button with the front doors closed.

• The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
• The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.

Unlocking

Press the button.

Opening

• Press button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest.
• Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked.
• Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked.

Comfort Access

Concept

The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key.

Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient.

The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

General information

Comfort Access supports the following functions:

• Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
• Convenient closing.
• Opening split doors.
• Open split doors with no-touch activation.

This function is not available in vehicles with a trailer hitch.

Functional requirements

• To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
• The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Unlocking

Abstract black-and-white graphic with a curved arrow and dot, no text or symbols present

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 63, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike when unlocking using the vehicle key, pressing the button on the outer door handle again does not unlock the other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again.

If the vehicle was locked automatically after driving off or with the button of the central locking system from the inside, note the following: if a door on a locked vehicle is opened from the inside with the door opener, pressing the button on the outer door handle will first lock the vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the outer door handle must be pressed again.

Locking

Abstract black-and-white graphic with a curved arrow and dot, no text or symbols present

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information

Warning

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

Closing

Simple diagram of a pen-like object with an arrow pointing to it, set against a dark gradient background (no text or symbols)

Press and hold down the button on the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof will be closed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Open split doors

General information

If the split doors are opened via Comfort Access, locked doors are not unlocked.

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the split doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the split doors is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The split doors swivel back and to the side when they open. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the split doors is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening

2 1

First press button in right-hand handle, arrow 1, then press button in left-hand handle, arrow 2.

Touchless opening of split doors

Concept

The split doors can be opened with no-touch activation using the vehicle key you are carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot motion in the center of the area at the rear of the vehicle and the split doors open.

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

This function is not available in vehicles with a trailer hitch or with a rear luggage rack preparation.

If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the split doors may open or close inadvertently if you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot movement is detected.

The sensor has an approximate range of 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehicle.

If the split doors are opened with no-touch activation, locked doors are not unlocked.

Contactless opening of the split doors must be activated in the settings.

Safety information

Warning

During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas system. There is a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do not touch the vehicle.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the split doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the split doors is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The split doors swivel back and to the side when they open. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the split doors is clear during opening and closing.

Adjusting

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate"
5. Select the desired setting:

"Open by foot movement"

Contactless opening of the split doors is switched on or off.

Performing the foot movement

1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at approx. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle.

2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction of travel and immediately pull it back. With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors.

Close-up of a person's lower body showing a car and foot with sound waves (no text or symbols visible)

Opening

1. Perform the foot movement described earlier.

The right side of the split doors opens.

1. After complete opening of the right side, make a second foot movement in order to open the left side of the split doors.

Before the opening, the hazard warning system flashes.

Malfunction

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:

- The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 55.

- Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

- Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.

Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects.

- Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic

devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key.

Do not transport the vehicle key together with electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request recognition function on the door handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or use the integrated key, refer to page 56.

Split Doors

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the split doors can be opened with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. To perform settings, refer to page 63.

When the trailer socket is in use, the split doors cannot be opened with the vehicle key or with the button in the car's interior.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the split doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the split doors is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

The split doors swivel back and to the side when they open. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the split doors is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the windows and heat conductors while driving. There is a risk of damage to property. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed objects do not hit the windows.

Opening from the outside

Diagram of a car's front bumper with numbered labels pointing to different areas, likely indicating inspection or categorization.

- Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.

With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or have the vehicle key with you.

Use the button in the handle to completely open first the right side, arrow 1, and then the left side of the split doors, arrow 2.

- Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking with the vehicle key, refer to page 54.

The right side of the split doors opens.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key again for approx. 1 second.

The left side of the split doors opens.

Opening from the inside

With Steptronic transmission: With the vehicle stationary, press the button in the driver's floor area.

If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P must be engaged first.

With manual transmission: With the vehicle stationary, press

the button in the driver's floor area twice in quick succession.

The right split door opens. Press button again to open the left split door as well.

Closing

To close the split doors, first close the left side, then the right side.

Driver profiles

Concept

In the driver profiles, individual settings for several drivers can be stored and called up again when required.

General information

There are three driver profiles with which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Every vehicle key has been assigned one of these driver profiles.

If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle key, the assigned personal driver profile will be activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own vehicle keys, the vehicle will apply the personal settings as it is being unlocked. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been

used in the meantime by a person with a different vehicle key.

Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently activated.

Functional requirements

For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver, the detected vehicle key must be clearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

• The driver is only carrying his or her own vehicle key.
• The driver unlocks the vehicle.
• The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door.

Adjusting

The settings for the following systems and functions are stored in the active profile. The scope of storable settings depends on country and equipment.

• Unlocking and locking.
• Lights.
• Radio.
• Instrument cluster.
• Programmable memory buttons.
• Volumes, tone.
• Control Display.
• Climate control.
• PDC Park Distance Control.
• Rearview camera.
• MINI Driving Modes.
• Intelligent Safety.
  – Driver's seat position, exterior mirror position.

Both the positions saved via the seat memory and the last position set are saved.

System limits

A clear assignment between the vehicle key and driver may not be possible in the following cases, for example.

• The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or her own vehicle key, but another person is driving.
• The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort Access and has multiple vehicle keys with him or her.
• The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked.
• Multiple vehicle keys are located outside of the vehicle.

Adjusting

General information

Depending on the package and country version, various settings are available for the vehicle key functions.

These settings are stored for the driver profile, refer to page 62, currently used.

Unlocking

Doors

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select the desired setting:
6. "Driver's door only" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.
7. "All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Split doors

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Doors/Key"

4.

The text next to the symbol indicates the current setting.

1. Select the desired setting:

2. "Split Rear Doors" Only the split doors are opened.

3. "Split Rear Doors and door(s)" The split doors are opened and the doors unlocked.
4. "Split doors open only when the vehicle has first been unlocked" The vehicle must be unlocked before the split doors can be used with the vehicle key.
5. "Button lock" It is not possible to use the split doors via the vehicle key.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, this setting may not be offered.

Automatic locking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select the desired setting:

- "Lock automatically"

The vehicle locks automatically after a while if no door is opened after un-locking.

- "Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

Automatic unlocking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is automatically unlocked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirmation signals.

- "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, locking by one.

- With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.

Alarm system

General information

When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes:

- Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or the split doors.

• Movements in the car's interior.
• Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle.
• Disconnected battery voltage.
• Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
• Locking the vehicle while a device is connected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 279.

The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically:

- Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed.

- Visual alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning system and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure function of the alarm system.

Overview

3D rendered object with a central sphere and an arrow pointing upward, against a black background (no text or symbols)

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/off

The alarm system is switched on or off as soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Access.

Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on

The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock.

Switching off the alarm, refer to page 66.

Opening the split doors with the alarm system switched on

The split doors can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on.

After the split doors are closed, they are locked and monitored again when the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

- Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

- Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Signals of the indicator lights

- The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

- Indicator light flashes for approx.

10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or split doors are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

- The indicator light goes out after un-locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

- The indicator light flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor

The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General information

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

• In automatic vehicle washes.
• In duplex garages.
• During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sea or on a trailer.
• With animals in the vehicle.
• When the vehicle is locked after start of fueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor can be switched off in such situations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator light lights up for approx.

2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Switching off the alarm

• Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
• Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and switch on the ignition using the emergency detection of the vehicle key, refer to page 55.
• With Comfort Access: if you have the vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle using the button on the driver's side or passenger side door.

Power windows

General information

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed except a gap.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.

Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Close-up of a car's side panel with four buttons and a smiling button (no text or symbols visible)

Power windows.

Safety switch.

Opening

- P is the switch to the resistance point.

The window opens while the switch is being held.

- P is the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening with the vehicle key, refer to page 53.

Closing

- P the switch to the resistance point.

The window closes while the switch is being held.

- P: the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient closing with the vehicle key, refer to page 54.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 59.

Jam protection system

Concept

The jam protection prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed.

General information

If resistance or a blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing action is interrupted.

The window opens slightly.

Safety information

Warning

Accessories on the windows such as antennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection system

In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

1. the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

1. the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protection.

Safety switch

General information

The safety switch can be used to prevent children, for instance from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear.

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the safety function is switched off automatically.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED lights up if the safety func-

tion is switched on.

Malfunction

General information

In certain situations a window can only be operated to a limited extent.

- After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the a window can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case.

- The power window motors are equipped with overheating protection. If a window is opened and closed several times within a short period of time, the overheating protection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the degree of overheating, it may only be possible to close the window or it may not be possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power window motor to cool down.

Initializing the system

The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running.

During initialization, the affected window closes without jam protection.

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. the switch to the resistance point and hold.

The window closes.

1. Continue holding the switch pulled to the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once or twice after approx. 15 seconds, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

1. Release switch.

Panoramic glass sunroof

General information

In the event of a severe accident, the glass sunroof is automatically closed.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Top-down view of a car dashboard with two illuminated buttons and control knobs (no visible text or symbols)

Tilting the glass sunroof

Press back the switch up to or beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is raised.

Opening glass sunroof

When the glass sunroof is closed

Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again

stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

- Slide switch back to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.

- Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Comfort position

In some models, the wind noises in the car's interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position.

Pressing the switch again opens the glass sunroof fully.

Closing glass sunroof

With the glass sunroof open

- Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised position.

- Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

- Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised

Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Jam protection system

Concept

The jam protection prevents objects or body parts from becoming jammed between the roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-roof is closing.

General information

If resistance or a blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is being closed, the closing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens slightly.

Closing without the jam protection system

If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

1. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

1. Push the switch forward again past the resistance point and hold until the glass

sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power interruption

After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI recommends having this work performed only by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Sitting safely

An ideal seating position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seating position plays an important role. Follow the information in the following chapters:

• Seats, refer to page 71.
• Safety belts, refer to page 74.
• Head restraints, refer to page 76.
• Airbags, refer to page 135.

Front seats

Safety information

Warning

Seat adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving.

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Manually adjustable seats

Overview

1 2 3 4

1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt

Forward/backward

Close-up of a car seatbelt with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly making sure it engages properly.

Height

Close-up of a car seatbelt mechanism with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Close-up of a car wheel with a gear and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease the curvature.

Electrically adjustable seats

General information

The current seat position can be stored using the memory function, refer to page 78.

Overview

1 4 3 2

1 Memory function
2 Lumbar support
3 Backrest tilt
4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt

Forward/backward

Close-up of a car door handle with buttons and a zipper, showing white arrows pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

Push switch forward or backward.

Height

Close-up of a car door handle with white arrows indicating left and right motion (no text or symbols)

Push switch up or down.

Seat tilt

Close-up of a camera mode dial with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Move switch up or down.

Backrest tilt

Close-up of a car's side panel with directional arrows indicating rotation or change (no text or symbols)

Move switch forward or backward.

Lumbar support

Concept

The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Adjusting

- Press the front/rear section of the button:

The curvature is increased/decreased.

- Press the upper/lower section of the button:

The curvature is shifted up/down.

Thigh support

Close-up of a car's seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.

Front seat heating

Overview

Close-up of a car air conditioning dashboard with three rotary gauges and control buttons (no readable text or symbols)

Seat heating

Switching on

Press the button once for each temperature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx.

15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is activated automatically with the temperature selected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to page 214, the heating output is reduced.

Switching off

Press and hold the button until the LEDs go out.

Safety belts

Number of safety belts and safety belt buckles

The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly.

The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seat are intended for the persons sitting on the left and right.

The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is intended for the person sitting in the middle.

General information

Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of the safety belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be transported and se-

cured in designated child restraint systems.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.

Warning

With a rear backrest that is not locked, the protective function of the middle safety belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.

Warning

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations:

- The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way.

- Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts

• Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to your body over your lap and shoulders.
• Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over your lap. The safety belt may not press on your stomach.
• Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.
• Avoid thick clothing.
• Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt

1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder and hip to put it on.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Unbuckling the safety belt

1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up mechanism.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to removed or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
• Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.
• Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
• Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
• Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
• Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height: John Cooper Works sport seat

The height of the head restraints cannot be set.

Adjusting the height

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle seat with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)

• To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
• To raise: push the head restraint up.
  After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Removing: John Cooper Works sport seat

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle headrest with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest forward.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

Warning

A missing protective effect due to removed or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
• Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.
• Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
• Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
• Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
• Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height

Close-up of a car's head and neck showing a white circular component with directional arrows indicating motion or movement (no text or symbols)

• To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
• To raise: push the head restraint up.
  After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Fold down

Interior view of a car showing a car seatbelt with numbered arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

• To fold down: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
• Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages correctly.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Close-up of a car's head and neck showing a white circular object with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 204, in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resistance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Memory function

Concept

The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function:

• Seat position.
• Exterior mirror position.

General information

Different settings can be assigned to two memory locations.

The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored.

Safety information

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Warning

Using the memory function while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the memory function when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview

Close-up of a black electronic device control panel with buttons and a grid of function buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Storing

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3. SET the button. The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. The LED goes out.

Calling up settings

The stored position is called up automatically.

Press the desired button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed.

Once underway, adjustment of the seat position on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.

Call up deactivated

After a brief period, calling up stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power.

To reactivate calling up of a seat position:

- Open or close the door or split doors.

- Press a button on the vehicle key.

- Press the Start/Stop button.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information

The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. The current exterior mirror position can be stored using the memory function, refer to page 78.

Safety information

Warning

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the traffic behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.

Overview

1 2 3

1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

Press the button.

The mirror movement follows the button movement.

Malfunction

In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.

Folding in and out

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.

Press the button.

Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the following situations:

- In vehicle washes.

- On narrow roads.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the ignition is switched on.

Automatic dimming feature

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior mirror, refer to page 81, are used to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror

Concept

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other formatting issue - low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.

Activating

1. slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.

2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating

Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

Diagram of a mechanical component with two upward arrows indicating motion or force, no text or symbols present

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob

Diagram of a bowl with a central circular object and directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature

Overview

Two black medical or anatomical views of a device, showing internal structures with white arrows pointing to features (no text or symbols present)

Photocells are used for control:

• In the mirror glass.
• On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements

• Keep the photocells clean.
• Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjusting the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.

Adjusting

Interior view of a car dashboard with a white arrow pointing to the left side of the keyhole (no text or symbols visible)

1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

The right place for children

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

A heated vehicle may result in death to persons, especially children, or animals. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not leave persons, especially children, or animals unattended in the vehicle.

Warning

Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their components to become very hot. Persons may sustain burn injuries when touching the hot components. There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Always transport children in the rear seat

General information

Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat.

Transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size.

Safety information

Warning

The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suitable additional child restraint systems. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger seat

General information

Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. For automatic deactivation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to page 137.

Safety information

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint systems

General information

Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child restraint systems.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint systems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident can be limited or lost. A child cannot be properly restrained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident.

If a child restraint system and its fastening system has been damaged or exposed to an accident, have these systems checked and replaced by the dealer's serv-

ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

Warning

Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.

Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 137.

Seat position and height

Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security

Interior view of a car showing a car seat with visible seats and driver seat, no text or symbols present.

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt

1. Pull out the belt strap completely.

2. Secure the child restraint system with the safety belt.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt

1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in completely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system

General information

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.

Pay attention to the operating and safety information from the child restraint system manufacturer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Safety information

Warning

If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are not correctly engaged, the protective effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely engaged and that the LATCH child restraint fixing system fits securely against the backrest.

Position

Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.

For vehicles equipped with a middle seat:

It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle safety belt instead for the middle seat.

Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems

Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems

1. Install child restraint system, see manufacturer's information.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly engaged.

Child restraint systems with tether strap

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective effect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes the upper anchor.

Warning

If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In certain situations, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the rear backrests are locked.

NOTICE

The anchors for the upper retaining straps of child restraint systems are only provided for these retaining straps. When other objects are mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only mount child restraint systems to the upper anchors.

Anchors

The respective symbol shows the anchor for the upper retaining strap.

Seats with an upper top tether are

marked with this symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.

Routing the retaining strap

1 2 6 3 5 4

1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the anchor

1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retaining strap between or along both sides of the supports of the head restraint to the anchor.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the anchor on the rear seat.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

Locking the doors and windows

Doors

Close-up of a car's side panel showing a double-headed arrow indicating vertical motion (no text or symbols)

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the rear.

This locks various functions so that they cannot be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 68.

Driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Start/Stop button

Concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine.

Steptronic transmission: the engine starts in selector lever

position P or N with the brake pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: the engine starts with the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed.

Ignition on

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button without stepping on the clutch pedal.

Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop button, but do not press on the brake pedal at the same time.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition off

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the clutch pedal.

Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever position P, press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Safety measures

The ignition is switched off automatically in the following situations while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is off:

- When locking the vehicle, even if the low beams are switched on.

- Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off.

- When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off.

- While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off.

- When the front doors are opened if there is no other person sitting in the front seats.

- The low beams switch to parking lights after some minutes of no use.

Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated selector lever, refer to page 105: when switching off the ignition, the selector lever position P is engaged automatically if the selector lever position R, D or M/S is engaged.

Radio-ready state

General information

In the radio-ready state, certain power consumers remain ready for operation.

Activating

With the engine running, press the Start/Stop button.

If the engine is not running and the ignition is switched on: the system automatically activates radio-ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.

Radio-ready state remains active if, for instance the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons:

- Opening or closing the driver's door.

- Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.

- When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights.

Switching off automatically

The radio-ready state is switched off automatically in the following situations:

- If the driver's or front passenger door is opened when exiting the vehicle, with the engine switched off manually.

- If the ignition is switched off manually with the Start/Stop button.

- After approx. 8 minutes.

- When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.

- Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.

Starting the engine

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

- Set the parking brake.

- On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.

- On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

In the case of repeated starting attempts or repeated starting in quick succession, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned. The catalytic converter can over-

heat. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in quick succession.

Gasoline engine

Depending on the motorization, the full drive power may not be available for approximately 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.

Steptronic transmission

Starting the engine

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Engine stop

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Steptronic transmission

Switching off the engine

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
   The engine is switched off.
   The radio-ready state is switched on.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button.
   The engine is switched off.
   The radio-ready state is switched on.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Concept

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts automatically for driving off.

After each engine start using the Start/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready and is activated at speeds faster than about 3 mph/5 km/h.

Depending on the selected driving mode, refer to page 157, the system is automatically activated or deactivated.

Engine stop

Functional requirements

The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following conditions:

Manual transmission:

• Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed.
• The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

Steptronic transmission:

• The selector lever is in selector lever position D.
• The brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped.
• The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

In order to be able to release the brake pedal, engage the selector lever in position P. The engine remains off.

To continue driving depress the brake pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine starts automatically.

The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.

The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been met.

Functional limitations

The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations:

• External temperature too low.
• The external temperature is high and automatic climate control is running.
• The car's interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level.
• The engine is not yet at operating temperature.
• The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.
• After driving in reverse.
• Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.
• The vehicle battery charge is very low.
• At higher elevations.
• The hood is unlocked.
• The parking assistant is activated.
• Stop-and-go traffic.
• Selector lever in selector lever position R, N or M/S.

Starting the engine

The engine starts automatically under the following conditions:

- Manual transmission: clutch pedal is pressed.

- Steptronic transmission: by releasing the brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode

After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met:

- The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.

- The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time.

The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

Functional limitations

Even if driving off was not intended, the deactivated engine starts up automatically in the following situations:

• Excessive warming of the car's interior when the air conditioning is switched on.
• When the steering wheel is turned.
• Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
• Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.
• The vehicle begins rolling.
• Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.
• The vehicle battery charge is very low.
• Excessive cooling of the car's interior when the heating is switched on.
• Manual transmission: low brake vacuum pressure; this can occur, for instance if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession.

Additional Auto Start/Stop function

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country-specific version, the vehicle features a variety of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop function uses this information to adapt to various traffic situations in a proactive manner.

For instance, this applies to the following situations:

- When a situation is detected in which the stopping time is expected to be very short, the engine is not switched off au-

tomatically. A message appears on the Control Display, depending on the situation.

- When a situation is detected in which the vehicle needs to drive off immediately, the engine is started automatically.

The function may be restricted if the navigation data is invalid, outdated or not available, for example.

Switching the system on/off

Using the button

Close-up of a car front-mounted sensor or connector with multiple white adjustment knobs (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button.

- LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

The engine is started during an automatic engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.

- LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop

During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, for instance when leaving it.

Steptronic transmission:

1. Engage selector lever position P.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

3. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission:

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation

In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, for instance if no driver is detected.

Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

Concept

The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

Interior view of a car dashboard with control buttons and passenger seat (no visible text or symbols)

Parking brake

Setting

With a stationary vehicle

Pull the switch.

The LED lights up.

The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set.

Depending on the stopping situation, the parking brake is engaged automatically.

Steptronic transmission: in some parking situations, the parking brake is automatically engaged, when selector lever position P is engaged. In these cases, the parking brake is released automatically when you leave the selector lever position P.

While driving

To use as emergency brake while driving: Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled.

The indicator light lights up red, a signal sounds and the brake lights light up.

A Check Control message is displayed.

If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop, the parking brake is engaged.

Releasing

Releasing manually

1. Switch on the ignition.
   ual transmission: press the ch while the brake pedal is pressed.
   Steptronic transmission: press the ch while the brake is pressed or se- or lever position P is set.
   The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Automatic release in cars with Steptronic transmission

For automatic release, step on the accelerator pedal.

The LED and indicator light go out.

The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator under the following conditions:

• Engine on.
• Drive mode engaged.
• Driver buckled in and doors closed.

Automatic release in cars with manual transmission

Drive off as usual. The parking brake disengages when the clutch pedal is released.

The LED and indicator light go out.

Under the following conditions, the parking brake is automatically released:

• Engine on.
• Gear engaged.
  – Driver buckled in and doors closed.
• Engine power is sufficient to drive off.

Malfunction

If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for instance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehicle.

After a power failure

Re-activating the parking brake

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Is the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.

It may take several seconds for the brake to be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds associated with this process are normal.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation.

Turn signal, high beams, head-light flasher

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Interior view of a car showing a car wheel and steering wheel with directional arrows indicating left and right motion (no text or symbols)

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its starting position after actuation. To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.

Triple turn signal activation

Lightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Signaling briefly

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Malfunction

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

Interior view of a car dashboard with two directional arrows indicating left and right control buttons (no text or symbols)

- High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.

- High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Wiper system

General information

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Car interior control panel with numbered directional arrows indicating vehicle positions or movement

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

• Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
• Intermittent operation or rain sensor, position 1.
• Normal wiper speed, position 2.
• Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe

Interior view of a car dashboard with a mounted device and directional arrow (no visible text or symbols)

Press the lever down.

• Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.
• Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating

Car interior control panel with numbered directional arrows indicating vehicle movement or navigation

Press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start.

Deactivating

Press the lever back into the standard position.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the interval.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sensor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Interior view of a vehicle showing a rotary switch mechanism with numbered arrows (0, 1, 2, 3) indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols beyond directional indicators)

Switching on

Turn the outer switch upward.

- Resting position of the wiper, position 0.

- Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

• In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released.
• In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept

The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the wipers stop in a close to vertical position.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a white plastic connector and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Close-up of a car's front wheel with two white arrows pointing left, indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Folding down the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Canada: wiper system

General information

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point.

- Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

- Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Switching off and brief wipe

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Press the lever down.

• To switch off from fast wiper speed: press down twice.
• To switch off from normal wiper speed: press down once.
  – Brief wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating/deactivating

Close-up of a car interior showing a plug inserted into the air gap, with no visible text or symbols.

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not start.

If a journey is interrupted with the rain sensor switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically activated again.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Close-up of a car dashboard with steering wheel, air vent, and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the interval.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sensor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-freeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Overview

Interior view of a car dashboard with a rotary switch and numbered move arrows (no text or symbols)

Switching on

Turn the outer switch upward.

• Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
• Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.

• In resting position: turn the switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released.
• In intermittent mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released.

The function is deactivated if the washer fluid reservoir level is low.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept

The fold-away position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up past the point of resistance and hold it for approx.

3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical position.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Close-up of a car's front wheel with two white directional arrows pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols)

Folding down the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Washer fluid

General information

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir.

Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

Warning

Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container.

Use of BMW's Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended.

Warning

Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the washing system. There is a risk of damage to

property. Do not add silicon-containing additives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not mix different windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixing ratios provided on the containers.

Overview

Black and white photo of a location pin icon with a warning symbol (no text or numbers visible)

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

Malfunction

The use of undiluted windshield washer concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 °F/-15 °C.

Manual transmission

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

When shifting to a lower gear, excessive speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.

Schematic diagram

R 1 3 5 2 4 6

• 1-6: forward gears.
• R: reverse gear.

Shifting

General information

Depending on the engine installation, the engine speed during a shifting operation is adjusted automatically as required for harmonious and dynamic gear shifting.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary. To overcome the resistance push the gear-shift lever dynamically to the left and engage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.

Steptronic transmission

Concept

The Steptronic transmission combines the functions of an automatic transmission with the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.

- On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Selector lever version

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a transmission with either a latching selector lever or a tap-operated selector lever is installed.

Transmission with a latching selector lever

P R N D

The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are selected by moving the selector lever into the respective selector lever position. The selector lever engages in the selector lever positions.

Transmission with a tap-operated selector lever

R N N D

The selector lever positions R, N, and D are selected by tapping the selector lever for-

ward or back. The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released.

The selector lever position P is engaged by pressing the P button on the selector lever or, in certain situations, automatically, refer to page 106.

Selector lever positions

Drive mode D

Selector lever position for normal vehicle operation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.

R is reverse

Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary.

Neutral N

The vehicle may be pushed or roll without engine power in selector lever position N, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to page 108.

Parking position P

General information

Selector lever position, for instance for parking the vehicle.

The transmission blocks the drive wheels in selector lever position P.

Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.

Automatic parking position for a transmission with a tap-operated selector lever

Selector lever position P is engaged automatically in situations such as the following:

• After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in the radio-ready state, refer to page 89, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 88, while selector lever position R, D or M/S is engaged.
• If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D, M/S or R is engaged.
• After the ignition has been switched off while selector lever position N is engaged.

Engaging selector lever positions: with a latching selector lever

General information

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Functional requirements

The selector lever can only be taken out of selector lever position P if the ignition is on or the engine is running.

Engaging selector lever position D, N, R, or P

With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be deactivated and the shift command will not be executed.

A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation:

- Unintentional shifting into selector lever position P or R.

- Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.

1. To release the selector lever lock: with the brake pedal depressed, press the button on the front of the selector lever.

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

1. Move the selector lever into the desired position.

P R N D

Engaging selector lever positions: with a tap-operated selector lever

General information

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Functional requirements

Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position.

Depending on the transmission version, the engine may have to be running too.

The selection lever position P cannot be changed until all technical requirements are met.

Engaging selector lever position D, N, R

A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation:

• Unintentional shifting into selector lever position R.

• Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.

• Press and hold the button to release the selector lever lock.

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a white arrow pointing to the mode (no visible text or symbols)

1. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever automati-

cally returns to the center position when released.

R M N D

Engaging selector lever position P

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a white arrow pointing to the shaft (no visible text or symbols)

Press button P.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General information

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N: with a latching selector lever

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage selector lever position N.

5. Release brake. The vehicle can roll.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Manually unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 111.

Engaging selector lever position N: with a tap-operated selector lever

1. Start the engine while pressing on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check Control message is displayed.

The vehicle can roll.

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when the ignition is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch ignition off in vehicle washes.

Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever position P is automatically engaged after approx. 15 minutes.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position.

Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 111.

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Sport program M/S

Concept

The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for a sportier driving style. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter.

Activating the Sport program

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance S1.

The sport program of the transmission is activated.

Ending the Sport program

Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual mode M/S

Concept

Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.

Activating manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D, arrow 1.

2 1 2

1. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward, arrows 2.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting

• To shift down: press the selector lever forward.
• To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.

The Steptronic transmission continues shifting automatically in certain situations, for instance when certain engine speed limits are reached.

With a tap-operated selector lever: when M2 is set manually while the vehicle is stationary, the transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is retained until you engage M1 manually or exit M.

Avoiding automatic upshifting

Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.

John Cooper Works: once particular engine speeds are attained, upshifting is not automatically performed in M/S manual mode.

For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission, automatic shift operations are not performed if one of the following conditions is met:

• DSC is deactivated.
• TRACTION is activated.

In addition, there is no downshifting for kickdown.

With the appropriate transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simultaneously activating kickdown and operating the left shift paddles. This is not possible by switching briefly via the shift paddles from selector lever position D to manual mode M/S.

Ending the manual mode

Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport transmission

Concept

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.

General information

Shifting

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for instance down-shifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.

Short-term manual mode

In selector lever position D, actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode temporarily.

After conservative driving in manual mode without acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.

It is possible to switch into automatic mode as follows:

• Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
• In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull the left shift paddle.

Continuous manual mode

In selector lever position S, actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode permanently.

Shifting

Interior view of a car dashboard with the Mini wheel and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

• Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.
• Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.
• Downshifting to the lowest possible gear: keep the left shift paddle pulled.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is displayed, for example P.

Releasing the transmission lock manually: with a latching selector lever

If the selector lever is locked in selector lever position P despite the ignition being switched on, the brake pedal being depressed and the button on the selector lever being pressed, the transmission lock can be unlocked manually:

Before unlocking the transmission lock manually, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, together with the lower retaining ring, from the center console. To do so, pull the retaining ring upward at the rear edge.

Close-up of a car's head and dashboard with a circular button labeled 'U' and an upward arrow symbol (no text or numbers present)

1. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector, if needed.

2. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 280, press the yellow release lever downward, see arrow.

Close-up of a car interior showing a mechanical component with an arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols visible)

1. Press the button on the front of the selector lever and move the selector lever back slightly.

Release the release lever.

1. Bring the selector lever into the desired position.

For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.

Releasing the transmission lock electronically: with a tap-operated selector lever

General information

Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.

Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

Engaging selector lever position N

Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the engine.

1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start.
3. Press the button on the selector lever, arrow 1, and press and hold the selector lever into selector lever position N, arrow N, until selector lever position N is displayed in the instrument cluster.
   A Check Control message is displayed.

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with labeled parts (R, N, 1) and a small phone on the shaft (no readable text or symbols beyond labels)

1. Release the selector lever.
2. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.
3. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own.
   For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.

Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch Control

Concept

Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction under dry surrounding conditions.

General information

The use of Launch Control causes premature component wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.

Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 208, period.

Do not turn the steering wheel when driving away with Launch Control.

Functional requirements

Launch Control is available as soon as the engine and transmission are at operating temperature.

Depending on the external temperature and driving style, the engine and transmission require an interrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order to reach the operating temperature needed for Launch Control.

Start with launch control

While the engine is running:

1. ☐按钮 and select SPORT with the MINI Driving Modes switch.

The instrument cluster displays TRACTION in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF indicator light lights up.

1. Engage selector lever position S.
2. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake.
3. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown.
   A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster.
4. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait briefly until the engine speed is constant. Keep accelerator pedal in this position.
5. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the flag symbol illuminates.

The vehicle accelerates.

Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the flag symbol is displayed and the accelerator pedal is not released.

Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the transmission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes before Launch Control can be used again.

After using Launch Control

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dynamic Stability Control again.

System limits

An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

Displays

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview

1 2 3 2 4 OFF 6 5 0 1/2

1 Tachometer 118

2 Indicator/warning lights

3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 118

5 Display/reset miles 118

6 Electronic displays 114

Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays

1 2 3

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, for instance Check Control

Time 119

External temperature 119

Selection lists 123

Total miles/trip odometer 118

Onboard Computer 123

2 Selector lever position 105

Gear shift indicator 121

3 MINI Driving Modes switch status 157

Check Control

Concept

The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.

General information

A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a SMS text message may appear on the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lights

General information

The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner may not be working.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

For releasing the parking brake, refer to page 94.

Brake system

Braking system impaired. Continue to drive moderately.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Approach control warning

Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued, for example when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Increase the distance.

Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential speed.

Intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Person warning

If a collision with a detected person is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead.

Camera-based cruise control, refer to page 160.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you. Indicator light flashes: the conditions are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until the driver actively resumes control of the vehicle by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Yellow lights

Antilock Braking System ABS

The Brake Assistant function may not activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance into account.

Have the system immediately checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce

speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.

Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

DSC, refer to page 155.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.

DSC, refer to page 155, and DTC, refer to page 156.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The FTM signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 143.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light illuminates: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.

Follow the information in the Check Control message.

The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot be detected.

• Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.
• TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.
• A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.
• Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 139.

Steering system

Steering system may not be working.

Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another quali-

fied service center or repair shop.

Emissions

- The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.

Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

- The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 279.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn sig-b has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 95.

Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights are switched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlight

control, refer to page 129.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are switched on.

Front fog lights, refer to page 132.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on.

High beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the traf-

fic situation.

High-beam Assistant, refer to page 131.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering

wheel.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on. High beams, refer to page 96.

Hiding Check Control messages

Interior view of a car showing a white arrow pointing to a plug inserted into the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Continuous display

Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed again automatically.

Temporary display

Some Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the SMS text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored.

SMS text messages

SMS text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messages

Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Depending on the Check Control message, further help can be selected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.

Messages after trip completion

Certain messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Fuel gauge

Concept

The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.

General information

Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to vary.

Information on refueling, refer to page 244.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

The arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Indicator light in the instrument cluster

The yellow indicator light illuminates, once the fuel reserve is reached.

Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine.

Odometer and trip odometer

Concept

The total mileage driven and the mileage driven since the last reset are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Instrument cluster without additional functions: reset trip distance

Press the button.

- The odometer is displayed when the ignition is switched off.

- When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

External temperature

General information

If the indicator drops to +37 °F/+3 °C, a signal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 °F/+3 °C there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures.

Display

The external temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Time

The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Set the time on the Central Information Display (CID), refer to page 42.

Date

The date is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Set the date on the Central Information Display (CID), refer to page 42.

Range

General information

When the remaining range is low:

• A Check Control message is displayed briefly.
• The remaining range is shown on the Onboard Computer.
• With a dynamic driving style, for instance fast cornering, the engine function is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears continuously below a range of approx.

30 miles/50 km.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Display

The current range is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Displaying the cruising range

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Range"

Current consumption

Concept

Displays the current fuel consumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Displaying the current consumption

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Current consumption"

Service notifications

Concept

The function displays the service notifications and the corresponding maintenance scopes.

General information

After the ignition is switched on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driving distance or time to the next scheduled maintenance.

A service advisor can read out the current service notifications from your vehicle key.

Display

Detailed information on service notifications

More information on the type of service required may be displayed on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
   Maintenance and service measures and legally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.

Automatic Service Request

Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections is automatically transmitted to your dealer's service center before your vehicle is due for service.

You can check when your dealer's service center was notified.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Teleservice Call"

Gear shift indicator

Concept

The system recommends the most efficient gear for the current driving situation.

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and with manual transmission.

Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipment version, shift to a more efficient gear.

Steptronic transmission: displaying

Example Description

Efficient gear is set.

Depending on the equipment version, shift to a more efficient gear.

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info

Concept

Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

General information

The camera at the base of the interior mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation.

Without a navigation system, the system is subject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic signs with speed limitations are detected and displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not displayed. Speed limits with extra text characters are always displayed.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Camera

Front view of a car with an upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Display

Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instrument cluster or via the Onboard Computer.

Close-up of a car interior showing a white arrow pointing to a button on the steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Press button on the turn signal lever several times, if needed.

Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Speed Limit Info

75

The last speed limit detected. Without a navigation system the traffic signals are grayed out after curves or longer stretches of roadway.

Without navigation system: no speed limit or cancellation is detected.

System limits

The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• When traffic signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers or paint.
• When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
• When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections.
• When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc.
• In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.
• When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.
• If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
• When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected.
• During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

Selection lists

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the buttons on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster can be used to display or use the following:

• Current audio source.
• Phone redial.
• Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button on the steering wheel	Function
	Move selection up.
	Move selection down.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

D BAYERN 3

Onboard Computer

Concept

The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such as average values.

Calling up information

Close-up of a car interior showing a white arrow pointing to a plug inserted into the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance

Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information:

• Range.
• GREEN Info.
  When GREEN Mode is activated.
  – Average consumption, fuel.
  – Average consumption since delivery from the factory.
• Current consumption, fuel.
• Average speed.
• Date.
• Engine temperature display.
• Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Speed Limit Info.

- Vehicle speed.

The unit of some information can be changed.

Setting units, refer to page 43.

Selecting information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select what information from the On-board Computer can be accessed in the instrument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Information in detail

Range

Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel.

The range is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN info

The achieved range extension may be displayed as a bonus range.

Average consumption

The average consumption is calculated for the period while the engine is running.

The average consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the Onboard Computer.

Average speed

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values

Interior view of a car showing a white arrow pointing to a connected plug or knob (no text or symbols visible)

Press and hold the button on the turn signal lever.

Engine temperature display

Concept

The current engine temperature, based on a combination of coolant and engine oil temperature is displayed. As soon as the optimum operating temperature has been attained, the indicator is in the center position.

General information

If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the engine, become too hot, a Check Control message is displayed too.

When the engine temperature is too high, a red indicator light is displayed.

When the engine oil temperature is too high, a red indicator light is displayed.

To check the coolant level, refer to page 276.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

OK

Instrument cluster without additional functions: Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

Onboard Computer on the Control Display

Concept

The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data on the Control Display, such as average values.

General information

Two types of Onboard Computers are available on the Control Display:

• "Onboard info": average values, such as the consumption, are displayed. The values can be reset individually.
• "Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a specific route and can be reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the Onboard Computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
5. "Reset": all values are reset.
6. "Automatic reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come to a standstill.
7. If necessary, "OK"

Driving Excitement

Concept

On the Control Display, sport instruments can be displayed, and the vehicle state can be checked before the use of the SPORT program.

Sport instruments

General information

On the Control Display, values for power and torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instruments

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"

4. "Sports instruments"
   Via MINI Driving Modes switch:

5. Activate SPORT.

6. "Sport displays"
7. "Sports instruments"

Speed warning

Concept

A speed limit can be set that when reached will cause a warning to be issued.

General information

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Adjusting

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as the speed warning

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central instrument cluster

Concept

The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions.

Basic displays

Basic functions, for instance the tachometer, can be set to be displayed continually if so desired.

Event displays

Functions that are only displayed temporarily, for instance the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This display corresponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.

Example: tachometer

Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster, the light animations of the tachometer's basic display show the current RPMs and the respective RPM warning thresholds.

Display

Car dashboard interior with numbered directional arrows indicating navigation or system control points

• Arrow 1: current RPM.
• Arrow 2: prewarning field.
• Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Basic display" or "Event display"
6. Select the desired setting.

Setting the brightness

The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Vehicle status

General information

The status can be displayed and actions performed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle status

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance

Symbols Description

(1) "Flat Tire Monitor": status of the run-flat tires, refer to page 143.

(2) "Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to page 139.

Symbols Description

"Engine oil level": Electronic engine oil level check, refer to page 272.

⚠️ "Check Control": Check Control messages are stored in the background and can be displayed on the Control Display. Displaying stored Check Control messages, refer to page 117.

💡 "Service required": displaying service notifications, refer to page 120.

💡 "Teleservice Call": Service Request.

Lights

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

Switches in the vehicle

Interior view of a car showing the steering wheel, dashboard, and keyway (no visible text or symbols)

The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel.

Symbol Function

#D	Front fog lights.
≡CA	Automatic headlight control.Cornering light.
0	Lights off.Daytime running lights.

Symbol Function

	Parking lights.
	Low beams.
	Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights

General information

Position of switch: 0, 3D 3D

If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off.

Parking lights

Position of switch: EDO

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise, the battery may become discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine.

When parking, switch on the one-sided roadside parking light, refer to page 130.

Low beams

Position of switch: ≡D

The low beams light up when the ignition is switched on.

Canada: roadside parking light

Concept

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle seatbelt and dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

With radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off

Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and pathway lighting

Welcome lights

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness, individual light functions may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch:

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Pathway lighting

General information

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic headlight control

Concept

The low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation.

General information

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

Activating

Position of switch:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

System limits

The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch the lights on manually.

Daytime running lights

General information

Position of switch: 0, 3DDE 30A

The daytime running lights light up when the ignition is switched on. After the ignition is switched off, the parking lights light up in position ≥ D≤ E

Activating/deactivating

In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the currently used vehicle key.

Cornering light

General information

Position of switch:

In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or, where applicable, the use of turn signals.

When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering angle.

Adaptive headlight range control

The adaptive headlight range control feature balances out acceleration and braking processes as well as the vehicle load conditions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.

High-beam Assistant

Concept

The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation.

General information

The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system.

The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.

The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time.

Activating/deactivating

Interior view of a car showing a car's seatbelt switch and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Position of switch, depending on the vehicle equipment: ☐ ☐ ☐

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switched between low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, refer to page 96.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits

The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. In situation that require this, therefore switch off manually.

The system is not fully functional in the following situations, and driver intervention may be necessary:

• In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation.
• When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
• In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways.
• In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs.
• When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Front fog lights

Concept

The front fog lights work alongside the low beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.

Functional requirement

The low beams must be switched on before switching on the front fog lights.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The green indicator light lights up if the front fog lights are switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 130, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights.

When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement

The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.

Adjusting

Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

Interior lights

General information

Depending on the equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights are controlled automatically.

The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting controls brightness of some of these features.

Overview

2 1 3 2

1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/off

Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on and off manually

Press the button.

The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light.

Ambient light

General information

Depending on the equipment version, lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car's interior.

Changing color

Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

Press the switch forward or backward and hold for approx. 3 seconds, until the ambient light illuminates

several times: automatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Brightness"

6. Adjust the brightness.

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Airbags

Interior view of a car with numbered anatomical labels pointing to specific sections

1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag

Front airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide adequate protection.

Side airbag

In the event of a side impact, the side airbag protects the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbag

In the event of a side impact, the head airbag protects the head.

Ejection Mitigation

The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side impact events.

Knee airbag

The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact.

Protective effect

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situation, for instance in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of the airbags

Warning

If the seat position is incorrect or the deployment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protection as intended and may cause additional injuries due to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the information on achieving the optimum protective effect of the airbag system.

• Keep a distance from the airbags.
• Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered.
• Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her

feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard.

• Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.
• There should be no additional persons, animals or objects between an airbag and a person.
• Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS devices or mobile phones.
• Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way.
• Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.
• Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or other objects to the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.
• Do not place seat cushions or other objects on the front seats that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.
• Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.
• Never modify either the individual components or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
• Do not remove the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with disabilities may affect the air bag system; con-

tact MINI Customer Relations for further information.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

Safety information

Warning

Individual components can be hot after triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual components.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not trigger as intended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

When the ignition is switched on, the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning

- Warning light does not come on when the ignition is switched on.

- The warning light lights up continuously.

Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbags

Concept

The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger's side are activated or deactivated.

General information

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning

To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system

When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear.

To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion.

• Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
• Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.
• Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.
• No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags

Close-up of a car seatbelt with control panel and door (no visible text or symbols)

The indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.

- The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

- The indicator light does not light up when, for instance a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are activated.

Detected child restraint systems

The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particularly in child restraint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbag

The explosive power that activates driver's/front-seat passenger airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control message is displayed.

Calibrating the front seats

Warning

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.

1. Move the respective seat all the way forward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. The seat moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.

The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disappears.

If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Concept

The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

General information

Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and, depending on the model, the tire temperature.

Further information and instructions on using the system can also be found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 248.

Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

- After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.

- After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted to a new value, a reset was performed.

- Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current status

The system status can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the system is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Additional information

The current tire inflation pressures are displayed too. The values shown are instantaneous measurements and may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions.

Resetting the system

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.

The following is displayed: "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor...".

After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driving.

After a successfully completed reset, the following is displayed: "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for recommended pressures.".

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically.

Messages

General information

A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Message

A symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Inflation was not carried out according to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a tire inflation pressure loss.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.

2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas station, check and correct the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, if necessary.

3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tire inflation pressure

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 257, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driving range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

• Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
• Longer braking distances.
• Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

Temperature

The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure loss

The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances.

Failure performing a reset

The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct.

Malfunction

The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed.

It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the following situations:

- A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, for instance an emergency wheel, is mounted: have it checked by a dealer's

service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

• Malfunction: have system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
• The system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again.
• Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

Concept

The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences between the individual wheels while driving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

• After a tire or wheel replacement, an initialization was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.
• After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was performed.

Status display

The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization required

An initialization must be performed in the following situations:

- After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted.

- After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initialization

When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Messages

General information

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.
   Run-flat tires, refer to page 257, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.
   If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driving range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions,

the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

• Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
• Longer braking distances.
• Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

• A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
• Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.
• When the system has not been initialized.
• When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.
• Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).

- When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety

Concept

Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance systems.

The intelligent safety systems can help prevent an imminent collision.

• Approach control warning with City light braking function, refer to page 147.
• Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation, refer to page 150.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off

Some Intelligent Safety systems are automatically active after every departure. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate according to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

- The LED goes out.

Approach control warning with city light braking function

Concept

The system may prevent some accidents. In the event of an accident, the system may reduce impact speed.

The system sounds a warning before an imminent collision and activates brakes independently, if needed.

The Brake Assistant function activates and applies the brakes with limited force and duration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

The approach control warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally, the approach control warning and braking are delayed in order to avoid false system reactions.

General information

The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings may vary with the current driving situation.

Braking is performed at speeds up to approximately 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Top-down view of three cars on a road with a shaded triangular area indicating perspective or perspective (no text or symbols)

Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air conditioner (no visible text or symbols)

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

Front view of a car with an upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

- The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Intelligent Safety"

4. "Warning time"

5. Select the desired setting.

The selected warning time is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarning.

Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning.

Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

Prewarning

This warning is provided, for instance when there is impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking as warranted.

Acute warning with braking function

An acute warning is displayed when there is an imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle approaching another object at a high speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision.

Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver to intervene. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. In order to activate the

Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking intervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

The driver may interrupt the braking intervention function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

The system's ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Detection range

The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late.

The following situations may not be detected, for example:

- Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed.

• Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
• Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
• Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• In tight curves.
• If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.
• If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
• Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.
• During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
• If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed.

Therefore, there may also be an excess of premature or unjustified warnings and reactions.

Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation

Concept

The system may prevent some accidents with pedestrians.

When driving at city speeds, the system will issue a warning if there is imminent

risk of a collision with pedestrians, and support this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

General information

In sufficiently bright conditions, the system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision with pedestrians in the speed range from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h

The system reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system.

Detection range

graph TD
    A["Car"] --> B{Traffic Section}
    B --> C["Path 1"]
    B --> D["Path 2"]
    C --> E["Top Road"]
    D --> F["Bottom Road"]

The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas:

• Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.
• Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

Front view of a car with an upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is displayed. The systems are individually

switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust the settings as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

- The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster.

The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver to intervene. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. In order to activate the Brake Assistant function, you must apply the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking intervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

The driver may interrupt the braking intervention function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

The system's ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Detection range

The detection potential of the camera is limited.

Thus, a warning might not be issued or be issued late.

The following situations may not be detected, for example:

• Partially covered pedestrians.
• Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.
• Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
• Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations:

• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• In tight curves.
• If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.
• If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
• Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.
  – During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
• If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.
• When it is dark outside.

PostCrash - iBrake

Concept

In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof.

At standstill

After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.

Harder vehicle braking

In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake Assistant allows.

To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. For a brief period, the braking pressure will be higher than the braking pressure that is achieved by the automatic braking function. This interrupts automatic braking.

Interrupting automatic braking

It can be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations, for instance for an evasive maneuver.

Interrupt automatic braking:

- By pressing the brake pedal.

- By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Antilock Braking System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking.

The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, which increases the active safety.

ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically boosts the vehicle braking capability to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during an emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the capabilities provided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Concept

Within the physical limits, the system helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

General information

DSC detects the following unstable driving conditions, for instance:

• Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
  – Loss of traction of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 156, is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

When driving with a roof load, for instance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's center of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situations. There

may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dynamic Stability Control when driving with roof load.

Indicator/warning lights

The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General information

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator light for DSC OFF

lights up in the instrument cluster and displays DSC OFF.

DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC

Press the button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

light go out.

Indicator/warning lights

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC is deactivated.

Automatic activation

When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation occurs in the following situations:

• The vehicle has a flat tire.
• When activating cruise control in the TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Concept

DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability Control where forward momentum is optimized.

The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions, for instance unplowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.

When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves.

Drive carefully.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

• When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.
• When driving off from deep snow or loose ground.
• When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press the button.

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light go out.

Performance Control

Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used.

ALL4

ALL4 is the all-wheel-drive system of your vehicle. Concerted action by ALL4 and DSC Dynamic Stability Control further optimizes traction and driving dynamics. The ALL4 all-wheel-drive system variably distributes the driving forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface.

Adaptive chassis

Concept

The tuning of the suspension can be changed with the system.

The system offers several different programs.

The programs are selected via the MINI Driving Modes switch.

Programs

MID/GREEN

Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for more comfort.

SPORT

Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorbers for greater driving agility.

MINI Driving Modes switch

Concept

The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.

Choose between three different programs.

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

Switch Program

SPORT

MID

GREEN

MID

MID provides balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is activated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

Concept

GREEN provides consistent tuning to maximize range.

Activating GREEN

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

SPORT

Concept

Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for greater driving agility.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tuning of the chassis and suspension also changes and SPORT can be individually configured.

The configuration is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Activating SPORT

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORT

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure SPORT"
5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is activated.

Configuring driving program

Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Driving mode:

- GREEN, refer to page 157.

- SPORT, refer to page 158.

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch displays a list of programs, which can be selected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster displays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

Concept

This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-off assistant

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steering function.

The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, and makes steering firmer when driving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts according to the driving program, so that a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Camera-based cruise control

Concept

Using this system, a desired speed and a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel.

The system maintains the desired speed on clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes automatically.

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situation allows.

The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive again shortly thereafter, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits.

General information

A camera on the interior mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead.

Depending on the settings, the characteristics of cruise control many change in certain ranges.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Risk of accident due to too high speed differences to other vehicles, for instance in the following situations:

- When fast approaching a slowly moving vehicle.

- Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.

- When fast approaching standing vehicles.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 162.

Store/maintain speed, refer to page 162.

Pause cruise control, refer to page 162.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 163.

Reduce distance, refer to page 163.

Increase the distance, refer to page 163.

Button Function

Increase speed, refer to page 162.

Reduce speed, refer to page 162.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country specifications.

Camera

Front view of a car with an upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Functional requirements

Speed range

The system is best used on well-constructed roads.

The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: the system can also be activated while the vehicle is stationary.

The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h.

Manual transmission: Active Cruise Control is interrupted below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not brake to a stop.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Display in the instrument cluster

lights up.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Display in the instrument cluster

lights up. The current speed is adopted as desired speed and displayed with symbol.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: when switching off while stationary, depress the brake pedal simultaneously.

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

Press the button on the steering wheel.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: when interrupting while stationary, depress the brake pedal simultaneously.

Interrupting automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

• When the driver applies the brakes.
• Manual transmission: when the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.
• If selector lever position N is set.
• Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
• If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
• If the detection range of the camera is impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy precipitation or glare effects from the sun.
• Manual transmission: if the vehicle in front decelerates below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
• With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: following a stationary period of approx. 3 seconds, after the vehicle was braked to a stop by the system.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press +or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The stored speed is displayed by the symbol in the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press the button.

Changing the speed

+ or -button: press until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

- button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

- or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

+ or -button: hold down to repeat the action.

Adjusting the distance

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to the system limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and maintain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by braking.

Reduce distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

Increase the distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

Continuing cruise control

General information

An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:

- When the system is switched off.

- When the ignition is switched off.

Calling up the stored speed and distance

Press the button with the system interrupted. Cruise control is continued with the stored values. The in-nt cluster briefly displays the d distance.

Switching distance control on/off

Safety information

Warning

The system does not react to traffic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.

Switching distance control off

Distance control can be switched off and on when driving with cruise control activated.

Press and hold this button.

Or:

Press and hold this button.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

To switch distance control back on, press one of the two buttons again briefly.

After changing over distance control, a Check Control message is displayed.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

In addition to the indicator light, the desired speed is displayed in the Info Display.

- Display lights up green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.

- Display lights up orange: system is interrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.

- No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set automatically after the system is switched on.

Instrument clusters without enhanced features: selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand portion of the Info Display.

Detected vehicle

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Symbol lights up orange: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions:

Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away.

ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, activate ACC as follows:

• By briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
• By pressing the RES CNCL button.
• By pressing the or button.

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Symbol flashes orange.

The conditions are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:

Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

System interrupted without detected vehicle.

System interrupted with detected vehicle.

System limits

Detection range

Top-down view of three cars driving on a road with a shaded lane (no text or symbols)

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.

Deceleration

The system does not decelerate in the following situations:

• For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-moving road users.
• For red traffic lights.
• For cross traffic.
• For oncoming traffic.
• Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking lighting at night.

Swerving vehicles

Top-down diagram of a road with two cars and a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected distance. It may not be possible to restore the selected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic transmissions: driving off

In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example:

- On steep uphill grades.

- In front of bumps in the road.

In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal.

Cornering

Top-down view of two cars driving on a curved road with dashed lane markings (no text or symbols visible)

When the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.

The system has a limited detection range. Situations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be detected very late.

Top-down view of a road with two cars ahead, showing a collision or perspective (no text or symbols)

When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independently.

Weather

The following restrictions can occur under unfavorable weather or light conditions:

• Poorer vehicle recognition.
• Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized.

Examples of unfavorable weather or light conditions:

• Wet conditions.
• Snowfall.
• Slush.
• Fog.
• Glare.

Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for instance by braking, steering or evading.

Engine power

The desired speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails or was automatically deactivated.

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

• When an object was not correctly detected.
• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• In tight curves.
• If the field of view of the camera or the windshield is dirty or covered.

• When driving toward bright lights.

• Up to 20 seconds after the start of the engine, via the Start/Stop button.

• During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

Cruise control

Concept

Using this system, a desired speed can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.

General information

The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the settings, the cruise control settings many change under certain conditions.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The use of the system can lead to an increased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance:

• On winding roads.
• In heavy traffic.

- On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet conditions, or on a loose road surface.

There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 167.

Store speed, refer to page 168.

Pause cruise control, refer to page 167.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 168.

Increase speed, refer to page 168.

Reduce speed, refer to page 168.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and is displayed with the symbol in the instrument cluster.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button on the steering wheel.

Interrupting automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

• When the driver applies the brakes.
• If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.
• If the gear engaged is too high for the current speed.
• If selector lever position N is set.
• Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
• If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press +or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instrument cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

SET

Press the button.

Changing the speed

+ or -button: press until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

• or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
• or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
• or button: press button to resistance point and hold. The vehicle accelerates or decelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Continuing cruise control

General information

An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Other-

wise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.

Calling up the stored speed

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The stored speed is reached again and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator light

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the indicator light in the instrument cluster indicates whether the system is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

The desired speed is displayed together with the symbol.

• Display lights up green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.
• Display lights up orange: system is interrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.
• No display: system is switched off.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features:

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

System limits

Engine power

The desired speed is also maintained down-hill, but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control

Concept

PDC is a support when parking. The system detects objects behind the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the vehicle are detected too. Objects that you are approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones and a visual display.

General information

The ultrasound sensors for measuring the distances are located in the bumpers.

The delete range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the following situations:

• By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.
• By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
• When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-

cle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Close-up of a car dashboard with five white plastic pushbuttons and a central button (no text or symbols visible)

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, for instance in the bumpers.

Functional requirements

Ensure full functionality:

- Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers, bicycle racks or similar.

- Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system switches on automatically in the following situations:

- If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.

The rearview camera also switches on.

- With front PDC: when obstacles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front PDC: automatic activation on obstacle detection can be switched off. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Parking"

4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on the vehicle equipment.

5. "Automatic PDC activation"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

- On: the LED lights up.

- Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.

Depending on the equipment version, the system cannot be switched off manually if the reverse gear is engaged.

Warning

Signal tones

An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals.

When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.

With front PDC: when objects are simultaneously located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission.

Volume

The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Tone"

4. "Volume settings"

5. "PDC"

6. Set the desired value.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in colors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera is displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

- For small children and animals.

- For persons with certain clothing, for instance coats.

- With external interference of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines.

- When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.

- If cargo protrudes.

- Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet condi-

tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

• With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.
• With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
• With moving objects.
• With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
• With objects with corners and sharp edges.
• With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.
• For objects with porous surfaces.
• Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

False warnings

The system may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:

• In heavy rain.
• When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice.
• When sensors are covered in snow.
• On rough road surfaces.
• On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
• In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, for instance in underground garages.
• In automatic vehicle washes.
• Due to heavy exhaust.
• Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources

is no longer present, the system is again fully functional.

With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detection, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switching on/off.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

Concept

The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment: button in the vehicle

Close-up of a car dashboard with five metallic buttons and a central white object (no visible text or symbols)

Park assistance button

Camera

Close-up of a car interior panel with a white arrow pointing to a component, no visible text or symbols

The camera lens is located between the license plate lights.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is switched on automatically if selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually

Press the park assistance button.

• On: the LED lights up.
• Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display.

Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID)

If the rearview camera view is not displayed, change the view via the Central Information Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirements

• The rearview camera is switched on.
• Split doors are completely closed.
• Keep the recording range of the camera clear.

Protruding cargo or carrier systems and trailers that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunctions.

Activating assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.

- Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius lines are indicated.

- Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"

Obstacles are marked, depending on the vehicle equipment.

Pathway lines

Aerial view of a long elevated road with parallel tracks, no visible text or symbols.

Pathway lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

Pathway lines depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Exterior view of a modern office building (no signage)

Turning radius lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road.

Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.

Obstacle marking

Close-up of two vertical cylindrical components mounted on a curved surface with a grid pattern below (no text or symbols visible)

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera.

The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control.

Parking using pathway and turning radius lines

1. Position the vehicle so that the turning radius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

Pure architectural line drawing of a road with diagonal and horizontal supports (no text or symbols)

1. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning radius line.

Exterior view of a modern office building (no signage)

Display settings

Brightness

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached and press the Controller.

Contrast

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objects

Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, some assistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Control chapter.

The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. There-

fore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.

The bumper of the vehicle is not visible in the camera picture. Therefore do not drive closer toward an obstacle than shown by the marks in the camera picture, even if the camera picture still shows a gap between the vehicle and the obstacle.

Parking assistant

Concept

Top-down view of a multi-lane road with cars and a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.

General information

Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps:

• Switching on and activating.
• Parking space search.
• Parking.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.

System status and instructions on required actions are displayed on the Control Display.

A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

NOTICE

The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Distance Control applies in addition.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Close-up of a car's front bumper with multiple white filter knobs and adjustment knobs (no text or symbols visible)

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Close-up of a car's side profile with a white arrow pointing to a corner detail (no text or symbols visible)

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel housing.

Functional requirements

Ultrasound sensors

Ensure full functionality:

• Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers.
• Keep the sensors clean and unob- structed.

For measuring parking spaces

• Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.
• Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space

• Gaps behind an object that has a min. length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
• Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
• Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.
• Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking

- Doors and split doors are closed.

• The parking brake is released.
• When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button

Press the park assistance button. The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with reverse gear

Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: P"Parking Assistant"

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.

White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and system status

(P)

- Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking assistant is activated and the parking space search is active.

- Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.

- The parking procedure is

active. The system takes over the steering.

- Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. Press the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear to switch on the parking assistant, refer to page 177. Activate the parking assistant, if needed.
   Parking assistant is activated.

1. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h

and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the display, refer to page 177.

1. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is indicated on the display.

1. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed.

Interrupting manually

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

- Press the park assistance button.

- "Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automatically

The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations:

• If the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.
• If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the display.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6mph / 10km / h .
• Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces.
• If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
• If the PDC Park Distance Control displays clearances that are too small.
• When switching into other functions of the radio.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resuming

An interrupted parking procedure can be continued, if needed.

Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to page 177, and follow the instructions on the display.

Switching off

The system can be switched off as follows:

- Press the park assistance button.

- Switching off the ignition.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to conditions or other factors, the system may not respond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

No parking assistance

The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations:

- In tight curves.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

• On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.

• On slippery ground.

• With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.

• With a mounted emergency wheel.
• With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, for instance under the following conditions:

• For small children and animals.
• For persons with certain clothing, for instance coats.
• With external interference of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines.

- When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.

- If cargo protrudes.

- Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

- With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

- With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

- With moving objects.

- With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

- With objects with corners and sharp edges.

- With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.

- For objects with porous surfaces.

- Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

- The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Tire size

The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components:

- Emission tested passenger compartment.

- Microfilter.

- Air conditioning system to control the temperature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.

Depending on the equipment specification:

- Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

- Automatic climate control.

- Parked-car ventilation.

Air conditioner

1 2 3 OFF 9 8 7 6 5 4 A/C

1 Air distribution settings
2 Air flow
3 Temperature
4 Seat heating, right 74
5 Air conditioning

6 Recirculated-air mode
7 Rear window defroster
8 Windshield defroster
9 Seat heating, left 74

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn the wheel for air flow all the way to the left.

Temperature

Concept

The system heats or cools, depending on the set temperature.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air conditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The air conditioner produces condensation water, refer to page 211, that will exit from below the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press the button:

The LED is illuminated when recirculated-air mode is switched on. The supply of outside air is shut off.

When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior.

To prevent window condensation, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the desired air flow.

The higher the air flow, the more effective the heating or cooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Controlling the air distribution manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Turn the wheel to select the desired program or the desired intermediate setting.

• Windows.
• Upper body region.
• Floor area.
• Windows, upper body region, and floor area.

To defrost windows and remove condensation

Make the following settings to defrost the windows and remove condensation:

• Direct the air distribution onto the windows.
• Increasing the air flow.
• Increase the temperature.
• Switch on the air conditioning if needed.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster

switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heating output is reduced.

Microfilter

In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter filters dust and pollen from the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 278.

Automatic climate control

1 2 3 4 5 AUTO OFF 6 7 MAX A C M A/C MAX A/C 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program

5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 74

9 Maximum cooling
10 Air conditioning
11 Recirculated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to the left until the control switches off.

Temperature

Concept

The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary by using the maximum cooling or heating power, and then keeps it constant.

Adjusting

Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

13 Windshield defroster
14 To defrost windows and remove condensation
15 Seat heating, left 74

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with air conditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 211, develops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is normal.

Maximum cooling

Concept

The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

General information

The function is available with external temperatures beyond approx. 32 °F/0 °C and with the engine running.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this.

The air flow can be adjusted with the program active.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.

AUTO program

Concept

The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically.

The air distribution and temperature are controlled automatically depending on the temperature in the car's interior and the desired temperature setting including the selected intensity of the air flow.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the AUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the floor area.

Point the side vents toward the side windows.

The following features are switched on automatically with the AUTO program:

- The air conditioning, refer to page 184.

To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution.

Intensity

With the AUTO program activated, the automatic intensity control can be changed.

Turn the ring to set the desired intensity from soft to intensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the position of the illuminated LED segment.

Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode

Concept

The automatic recirculated-air control AUC recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air. The outside air supply is shut off and the interior air is recirculated.

General information

If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically.

If the system is deactivated, outside air continuously flows into the car's interior.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases.

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Switching on/off

Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

- LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.

- Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and shuts off automatically.

- Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

If windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculating mode and press the AUTO button. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.

Adjusting the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually.

General information

To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO program first.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the desired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Adjusting the air distribution manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Press the button repeatedly to select a program:

• Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
• Upper body region and floor area.
• Floor area.
• Windows and floor area.
• Windows.
• Windows and upper body region.
• Upper body region.

To defrost windows and remove condensation

Concept

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows.

Switching on/off

Press the button.

The LED is illuminated with the

system switched on.

The air flow can be adjusted with the program active.

If there is window condensation, switch on the air conditioning too.

Windshield defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster

switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heating output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

In external and recirculated-air mode, the microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 278.

Ventilation

Setting

The air flow directions can be individually adjusted:

- Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto the person. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature.

- Indirect ventilation:

If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air is directly routed into the car's interior.

Front ventilation

Close-up of a car's air vent with directional arrows indicating airflow or pressure zones (no text or symbols)

- Turn knob for continuous opening and closing of the vents.

- Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow, arrows.

Ventilation in the rear

1 1 2

– Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 1.

- Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing of the vents, arrow 2.

Parked-car ventilation

Concept

The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's interior and lowers its temperature, if needed.

General information

The parked-car ventilation can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset activation times. The system remains switched on for 30 minutes.

The parked-car ventilation system is operated via the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements

- Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready state.

- Direct operation or preset activation time: does not depend on external temperature.

- Battery is sufficiently charged.

If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the maximum activation time to save the vehicle battery. The system will be available again after the engine is started or after a short trip.

- Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

- Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the activation time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "Comfort ventilation"

5. Select the desired activation time.

6. Set the desired time.

Activating the activation time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Climate functions"

4. "For start time at:"

Activate the desired activation time.

The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the activation time is activated.

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on.

The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reactivated.

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Integrated Universal Remote Control

Concept

The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting systems.

General information

The Integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

If possible, do not install the antenna of the remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door drive, near metal objects to ensure the best possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

Compatibility

If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the owner's manual of the system to be controlled, the system is generally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control.

Additional questions are answered by:

- A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

- www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

Overview

1 2 3

1 LED
2 Programmable keys
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information

The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be fully charged at the time of programming to ensure an optimal range of the integrated universal remote control.

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior mirror.

1. Press the interior mirror button to be programmed. The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
3. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold

down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

1. • The LED lights up green: programming completed.

Release the button.

- The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete.

Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this procedure three times to complete the programming procedure.

If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

- LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not completed.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

To program other functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

Special feature of the rolling code wireless system

If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features a rolling code radio system.

Refer to the owner's manual for the system.

For systems with a rolling code radio system, the integrated Universal Remote Control and the system also have to be synchronized.

Please read the owner's manual to find out how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.

Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed, e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, release the button.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 ~cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
7. The LED lights up green: the programming procedure is completed. Release the button.

- The LED flashes fast: the hand-held transmitter was detected but programming is not complete. Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this procedure three times to complete the programming procedure. If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems.

- LED does not flash green after 60 seconds: programming not completed.

Repeat steps 3 to 6.

If the programming procedure is not completed, the previous programming will remain unchanged.

Operation

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions

All stored functions will be deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror flashes green rapidly.

Digital compass

Overview

2 NH 1

1 Control button
2 Mirror display

Mirror display

The compass shows the current driving direction.

Operating concept

Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed:

• Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
• 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
• 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
• 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting.
• 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle so that the compass operates correctly; refer to World map with compass zones.

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure

1. Press and hold the control button for approx. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the control button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corresponds with your location appears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following:

• The wrong compass point is displayed.
• The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel.
• Not all points of the compass are displayed.

Procedure

1. Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for approx. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph / 7 km / h . If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering

The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language

Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the

control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after approximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shield

To provide protection against glare, fold the sun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover.

When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no visible text or symbols)

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.

Ashtray

In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

Warning

Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage to property. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not use the cigarette lighter.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Sockets

Concept

The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the ignition is switched on or the engine is running.

General information

The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using non-compatible connectors.

Safety information

Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

In the center console

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no visible text or symbols)

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area

Interior view of a car showing the door, seat, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.

USB port

General information

Follow the information regarding the connection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections, refer to page 48.

In the front center console

Close-up of a car's front panel showing a circular button with an arrow pointing to a battery icon (no text or symbols visible)

The USB port is located in the front of the center console.

Properties:

• USB port Type A.
• For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.
• Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

In the rear center console

Close-up of a car air intake console with two fans and a power button (no visible text or symbols)

One USB dual charge socket is located in the rear center console.

Properties:

• USB port Type C.
• For charging of mobile devices.
• Charge current: max. 3 A.

Under the center armrest

Close-up of a car rearview seatbelt with a small battery icon (no text or symbols visible)

The USB port is located under the center armrest.

Properties:

• USB port Type C.
• For charging of mobile devices.
• Charge current: max. 3 A.

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

NOTICE

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Overview

The following storage compartments are available in the car's interior:

• Glove compartment on the front passenger side.
• Compartments in the doors.
• Storage compartment in the center arm-rest.
• Storage compartment in front of the cup holders.
• Clothes hooks
• Storage compartments in the cargo area.
• Storage tray in the center console.
• Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

Warning

Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment immediately after using it.

Opening

Interior view of a car dashboard with a hand cursor pointing to the side panel (no visible text or symbols)

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing

Fold up the cover.

Compartments in the doors

General information

There are storage compartments in the doors.

Safety information

Warning

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage compartments.

Center armrest

General information

Two storage compartments are located in the center armrest.

Opening

Close-up of a car headrest lever with two directional arrows labeled 1 and 2 pointing to the key (no text or symbols beyond arrows)

Upper storage compartment: press button, arrow 1, and fold the center armrest up, arrow 2.

Close-up of a car headrest lever mechanism with two directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Lower storage compartment: press button, arrow 1, and fold the center armrest up, arrow 2.

Cup holders

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car's interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the traffic conditions and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages.

Front

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

In the center console.

Rear

General information

The cup holder is located in the center arm-rest.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a highlighted arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. To open: press the button.

To close: push both covers back in, one after the other.

Safety information

NOTICE

With an open cup holder, the center arm-rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of damage to property. Press back the covers before the center armrest is folded up.

Clothes hooks

General information

The clothes hooks are located above the rear doors.

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending clothing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.

Warning

Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks.

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Loading

Safety information

Warning

High gross weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause a sudden drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics may be negatively impacted, reducing lane stability, lengthening the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight.

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure

loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

NOTICE

The cargo floor panel is designed for a particular maximum weight. Weight that is too high and that is selective can damage the cargo floor panel. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not exceed the maximum load of the cargo area floor and evenly distribute the cargo across the cargo area floor.

The maximum load is 881 lbs / 440 kg.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on your vehicle's placard.

1. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
2. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
3. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
4. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
5. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

+ ≦ Max. Load + ≦ Max. Load + ≦ Max. Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo

• Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
• Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.
• Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.
• If necessary, fold down the rear back-rests to stow large cargo.
• Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

With storage compartment package: lashing eyes in the cargo area

Top-down view of a car trunk with white arrows indicating upward and downward motion directions (no text or symbols)

With storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Cargo cover

Safety information

Warning

Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

Closing

Warning

An incorrectly inserted cargo cover can be thrown about the car's interior, such as in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Make sure the cargo cover is securely engaged in the brackets.

Interior view of a car trunk with three white arrows pointing to different areas (labeled 1, 2, and 3), no text or symbols present.

Pull out the cargo cover, arrow 1, and hook both sides into the brackets, arrow 2.

Opening

Warning

A cargo cover that snaps back quickly can jam body parts or cause damage. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not let the cargo cover snap back into place.

Pull over the cargo cover and hook into the brackets on both sides.

Removing

For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can be removed.

Close-up of a vehicle's dashboard and engine compartment with numbered arrows indicating specific parts (no readable text or symbols)

Press the release button, arrow 1, and pull the cargo cover out towards the rear, arrow 2.

Installing

Slide the cargo cover in until it engages on both sides with an audible click.

Storage compartments in the cargo area

Side storage compartments

Storage compartments are located on the left and right sides.

Storage compartments in the split doors

There are storage compartments in the split doors.

Multi-function hook

Warning

Improper use of the multi-function hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers, for example. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects, such as shopping bags, from the multi-function hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.

Interior view of a car showing the door panel with a white arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols visible)

A multi-function hook is available on the right side of the cargo area.

Enlarging the cargo area

Concept

The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:

• The rear seat backrests can be folded down.
• The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position using the cargo setting.

General information

The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat backrest is connected to the center section.

With through-loading system: the rear seat backrest is divided into three parts at a 40-20-40 ratio. The side rear seat backrests and the center section can be folded down separately.

The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the rear.

Safety information

Warning

Danger of jamming with folding down the backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo can be thrown about the car's interior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back.

Warning

With a rear backrest that is not locked, the protective function of the middle safety belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Folding down the rear seat backrest from the rear

1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded down, fold in the center head restraint if necessary.
2. Press the switch and pull the rear seat backrest forward.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat, rear seats, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Cargo position

Concept

The rear seat backrests can be moved into an upright loading position.

Adjusting

1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
2. Fold the frame up until it engages.

Close-up of a door handle with an arrow pointing to the lock (no text or symbols visible)

1. Fold back and engage the rear seat backrest.

Folding down the center section

1. Fold in the middle head restraint.
2. Press the switch and pull the center section forward.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt, with a white arrow pointing to the backrest area (no text or symbols visible)

Folding back the backrest

Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not caught behind the backrest or in between the backrest and the rear seats.

Variable cargo area floor

Concept

With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to transport requirements.

General information

Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to page 201.

Removing the cargo floor panel

1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel upward.

Interior view of a car trunk showing the rear compartment with a white plastic bag and an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols visible)

1. Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold slightly upward.

Interior view of a car showing two plastic-covered rear compartments (no text or symbols visible)

1. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from the brackets.

Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall the cargo area floor.

Folded up position

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the variable cargo floor panel can lead to a danger of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property.

- Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to separate the cargo area and car's interior in the sense of a partition net.

- Only use the variable cargo floor panel in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked.

- Fold down the variable cargo floor panel before driving off.

- Always secure cargo against shifting, using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for instance.

Fold up the cargo floor panel

Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel upward.

Interior view of a car showing the rear trunk compartment with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Fold up the cargo floor panel and press behind the locks on the left and right, arrow. You've reached the maximum cargo height.

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Breaking-in period

General information

Moving parts need to begin working together smoothly.

The following instructions will help you to achieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.

During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, refer to page 112.

Safety information

Warning

Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of accident. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and intervene early if necessary. Observe the break-in procedures of the respective parts and components.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed:

- For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned

above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing split doors

Safety information

Warning

An open split door protrudes from the vehicle and can endanger occupants and other road users or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with split doors open.

Driving with the split doors open

If nevertheless you need to drive with split doors open:

• Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
• Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
• Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust gas system

Warning

High temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system, including the exhaust pipe.

Warning

If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and injuries. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during parking.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

Warning

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mobile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual interference and deflect the radiation from the car's interior.

Hydroplaning

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Driving through water

General information

When driving through water, follow the following:

• Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function.
• Drive through calm water only.
• Drive through water only if it is not deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
• Drive through water no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through too deep water, water can enter into the engine compartment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through water.

Braking safely

General information

The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking System ABS as a standard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situations that require such.

Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gently press the brake pedal every few miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic.

The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills

General information

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system.

Warning

In idle state or with the engine switched off, safety functions, for instance engine braking effect, braking assistance and steering assistance, may not be available. There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or with the engine switched off.

Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances:

• Low mileage.
• Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.
• Infrequent use of the brakes.
• Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response - generally this cannot be corrected.

Condensation water under the parked vehicle

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops and collects underneath the vehicle.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g., curbs or underground garage entrances, contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler, and the underbody may occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance available.

Roof-mounted luggage rack

General information

Installation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Mounting

Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Loading

Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

• Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.
• Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
• Distribute the roof load uniformly.

• The roof load should not extend past the loading area.

• Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.

• Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance using ratchet straps.
• Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac- celeration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Driving on racetracks

Warning

The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motor sport type competition. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type competitions.

Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This wear is not covered by the warranty.

Reducing fuel consumption

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of consumption and emission values.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors.

The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can influence fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass sunroof

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.

Tires

General information

Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for instance tire size may influence consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without delay

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high engine speeds

Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indicator, refer to page 121.

Use coasting conditions

When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.

For going downhill take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longer stops

Switching off the engine

Switch off the engine during longer stops, for instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop.

If the engine is switched off and then re-started rather than leaving the engine running constantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also determined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.

Switch off these functions if they are not needed.

Have maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI recommends that maintenance work be performed by a MINI service center.

Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer to page 278.

GREEN Mode

Concept

GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort features, for instance the climate control output, are adjusted.

For Steptronic transmission:

Under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce consumption. The D selector lever position remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an efficient driving style.

The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range.

General information

The system includes the following functions and displays:

• GREEN Limit, refer to page 215
• GREEN climate control, refer to page 215.
• GREEN bonus range, refer to page 216.
• GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to page 216.
• Coasting driving condition, refer to page 217.

Activating GREEN Mode

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Select the desired setting.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure GREEN"

5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating the functions

The following functions can be activated/deactivated:

• "GREEN speed warning"
• "GREEN climate control"
• "Coasting"

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

GREEN Limit

• "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit is activated.
  A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
• "Tip at:"
  Set the desired speed for the GREEN Limit.

GREEN climate control

Climate control is set to be efficient.

By making a slight change to the set temperature and adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior consumption can be economized.

The power output to the seat heater and exterior mirror is reduced.

Coasting

Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the engine and coasting, refer to page 217, with the engine idling.

This function is only available in GREEN Mode.

Deactivate the function to use the braking effect of the engine when traveling downhill.

GREEN potential savings

Shows potential savings with the current settings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN bonus range

A modified driving style helps you extend your driving range.

The range extension can be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster.

The bonus range is shown in the range display.

The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.

- Green display: efficient driving style.

- Gray display: modify driving style, for instance by backing off the accelerator pedal.

Efficiency display

A bar display in the instrument cluster indicates your current driving efficiency.

Mark in the left area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered

by coasting or when braking.

Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when accelerating.

The efficiency of your driving style is shown by the position of the mark:

- Mark inside the green range: efficient driving style.

- Mark outside the green range: modify driving style, for example by backing off the accelerator.

GREEN tip, driving instruction

General information

The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more efficient, for example by backing off the accelerator.

Instrument cluster without enhanced features: display

D GREEN + 46.8 km

Activating/deactivating the display

Activate information relating to the driving style and GREEN tips in the instrument cluster using the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "GREEN info"

GREEN tip, symbols

An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed.

Symbol Measure

	For an efficient driving style, look well ahead when driving, accelerate conservatively, and delay accelerating.
	Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.
	Steptronic transmission:Switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions.
	Manual transmission:Follow the shift instructions.
	Manual transmission:Engage neutral for an engine stop.

Coasting

Concept

The function helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged.

This driving condition is referred to as coasting.

As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again.

General information

Coasting is a component of the GREEN driving mode.

Coasting is automatically activated when the GREEN driving mode is called via the MINI Driving Modes switch, refer to page 157.

A proactive driving style helps the driver to use the function often and supports the efficient effect of coasting.

Functional requirements

The function is available in the speed range from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to 100 mph/160 km/h.

• Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated.
• The selector lever is in selector lever position D.
• Engine and transmission are at operating temperature.
• With a camera in the area of the interior mirror: the system does not detect any vehicles ahead of you.

Operation via shift paddles

Concept

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the coasting mode can be influenced with the shift paddles.

Activating/deactivating coasting via shift paddles

1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right shift paddle again.
   To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.

Display

Instrument cluster without enhanced features

> +46.8

The bar display below the tachometer is filled in green and the mark appears at the zero point. The tachometer indicates idle speed.

System limits

The function is not available if one of the following conditions applies:

• DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.
  – Cruise control is activated.
• If driving in the dynamic limit range.
• If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
• The battery charge state is temporarily too low.
• The vehicle electrical system is drawing excessive current.

General information

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Control elements

1 BAND MODE 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 5

1 Waveband/satellite radio
2 Change entertainment sources
3 Sound output on/off, volume
4 Changing the station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons

Sound output

Safety information

Warning

A high sound output volume can damage your hearing. There is a risk of injury. Do not adjust the volume too high.

Volume and sound output

- Turn the button to adjust the volume.

- Press the button to switch off the sound output. Pressing the button again restores the previous volume setting.

Audio recording playback is stopped during muting.

Entertainment sources

General information

Possible entertainment sources:

• Radio, refer to page 224.
• USB audio, refer to page 232.
• Bluetooth audio, refer to page 232.

Changing the entertainment source

On the radio:

1. Press the button.

A list of all currently available entertainment sources is displayed.

1. Press the button again to select an entertainment source.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Media/Radio"

A list of all possible entertainment sources is displayed.

1. Select the desired entertainment source.

Via the button on the Controller:

1. Press the button.

The most recently selected entertainment source is played.

1. Press the button again.

A list of all currently available entertainment sources is displayed.

1. Select the desired entertainment source.

Tone

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Treble, bass, balance, and fader

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired setting:

4. "Treble": treble adjustment.

5. "Bass": depth adjustment.
6. "Balance": left/right volume distribution.

7. "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.

8. To adjust: turn the Controller.

9. To store: press the Controller.

Volume equalization

Concept

An automatic increase of the volume can be set to compensate for the increasing driving noises at higher speeds.

Set automatic volume increase

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"

4. Select the desired setting:

5. "Speed volume": ratio of entertainment volume to speed.

6. "PDC": ratio of the volume of the PDC signal tone to the entertainment volume.

The basic setting ensures that the signal tone is audible at any volume.

- "Gong": ratio of the volume of the signal tone, for instance for safety belt reminder, to the entertainment volume.

The basic setting ensures that the signal tone is audible at any volume.

- "Microphone": sensitivity of the microphone during a phone call.

The setting is adjusted while calling and is stored for the mobile phone used.

- "Speakers": volume of the loudspeakers during a phone call.

Audio recording playback is stopped during muting.

The setting is adjusted while calling and is stored for the mobile phone used.

Reset the tone settings

The tone settings are reset to the factory settings.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"

Radio

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

AM/FM station

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it may not be possible to receive AM stations.

Radio Data System RDS

Concept

RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM waveband.

It is recommended to switch on RDS.

Switching on/off

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Press the button.

4. "RDS"

Selecting a station

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"

The last station listened to will be played and the station list displayed.

1. Select the desired station.

Changing the station

On the radio:

Press the left or right button.

The previous or next station from the list of stations is played.

Storing a station

General information

A symbol on the highlighted channel indicates whether the channel has already been stored.

Symbol Meaning

☆+ Station is not stored.
☆ Station is already stored.

Storing the station being played

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Save station" The storage list is displayed.
5. Select the desired memory location.

Storing a station that is not being played

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Highlight the desired station.
4. Press the Controller and hold until the storage list is displayed.
5. Select the desired memory location.

The stations can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 41.

Selecting a station manually

Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Manual search"
5. To select the frequency: turn the Controller.
6. To store the frequency: press the Controller.

Renaming a station

When storing a station with RDS signal, the RDS information transferred during storing is accepted as the station name. The station name can be changed.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Press the button.
5. "Rename to:"

If necessary, wait until the name of the desired station appears.

1. Press the Controller to store this name.

Additional station information

Concept

If a radio station broadcasts radio text or radio text plus, this information can be displayed, for instance the track or performer of the music. Availability, content and sequence are set by the radio station.

Displaying additional station information

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Press the button.
5. "Station info"

HD Radio™ reception

Concept

Many radio stations broadcast both analog and digital signals.

General information

When setting a station with a digital signal, it may take a few seconds before the station plays in digital quality.

Information about HD Radio stations whose station name ends with ...HD or with ...HD1:

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Information about HD Radio multicast stations whose station name ends with ...HD2, ...HD3, ...:

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, there may be interruptions of the audible signal lasting

several seconds. The duration of the interruption depends on the reception.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it may not be possible to receive AM stations.

1. Press the button.

2. "HD Radio reception"

H) This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital.

Displaying additional information

Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the artist.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it may not be possible to receive AM stations.

1. Select a station.

2. Press the button.

3. "Station info"

License conditions

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from

iBiquity Digital Corporation. U. S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Satellite radio

General information

Before a channel can be played, you must subscribe to it via telephone. Several channels can be combined into specified packages.

Managing a subscription

General information

In order to enable or unsubscribe from channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Enabling channels

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Show subscription info" The phone number and identification number of the radio are displayed.

5. Call the phone number to have the channel enabled.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Show subscription info" The phone number and identification number of the radio are displayed.

5. Call the phone number to cancel your subscription to the channel.

Selecting channels

You can only listen to enabled channels.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"

The last channel played will be played back and the channel list displayed.

1. Select the desired channel from the channel list.

To display information about the selected channel:

1. Highlight a channel.
2. Press the button.
3. "Channel information"

Adjusting display of the channel list

The display of the playback list can be adjusted.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Change view"
5. Select the desired display:

- "Channel"

The name of the channel will be displayed.

- "Artist"

The name of the artist playing will be displayed.

- "Titles"

The name of the track playing will be displayed.

Changing the channel

Press the button on the radio.

The next and/or previous channel from the channel list is played.

Storing a channel

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"

A symbol on the highlighted channel indicates whether the channel has already been stored.

Symbol Meaning

Channel is not stored.

Channel is already stored.

To store the channel played:

1. Move the Controller to the left.
2. "Save station"

The storage list is displayed.

1. Select the desired memory location.

Or:

1. Highlight the played channel.
2. Press the Controller.

The storage list is displayed.

1. Select the desired memory location.

To store a channel other than the one played:

1. Highlight the desired channel.
2. Press the Controller and hold until the storage list is displayed.
3. Select the desired memory location.

Or:

1. Highlight the desired channel.
2. Press the button.
3. "Save in presets"

The storage list is displayed.

1. Select the desired memory location.

The stations can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons.

Selecting a category

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Category"
5. Select the desired category.

The subscribed channels from this category are displayed.

1. Select the desired channel.

Timeshift

General information

The channel you are currently listening to is stored in a buffer for up to an hour.

Prerequisite: the signal must be available.

The stored audio track can be played with a delay following the live broadcast. When the memory is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The memory is cleared when a new channel is selected or when the vehicle is switched off.

Opening the timeshift function

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Time shift"

Time shift forward/reverse

Within the stored recording, it is possible to jump to any point in time.

Press the button on the radio or turn the Controller.

You can jump to the next or the previous track.

Press and hold the button on the radio.

The recording is spooled forward or back.

Timeshift menu

Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast.

Automatic timeshift deactivated/activated.

▷ / ||Playback/pause.

Automatic timeshift

With automatic timeshift, audio playback is paused for the following events.

• Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
• Activation of the voice activation system.
• Muting.

After that, audio playback is continued from the time of the interruption.

1. Move the Controller to the left.
2. To activate:

"Automatic time shift"

Deactivate:

"Automatic time shift".

Smart Favorites

General information

A maximum of 6 channels can be stored as Smart Favorites.

If a stored channel is selected, the current track will be played from the beginning.

Adding the current channel to Smart Favorites

1. Press the button.

2. "Add to Smart Favorites"

Removing the current channel from Smart Favorites

1. Press the button.
2. "Remove from Smart Favorites"

Selecting Smart Favorite

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Category"
5. Select a Smart Favorite.
   The subscribed channels from this category are displayed.
6. Select the desired channel.

Favorites

General information

A performer, a track, a league or a team can be stored as a favorite. If the stored favorite is played on a channel, a message appears on the Control Display. Up to 30 Favorites can be stored.

Storing the artist or track

It is only possible to store Favorites that are currently being broadcast. The channel information must be available.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Add to favorites"
5. Highlight the performer or track, and press the Controller.

A symbol indicates whether the artist and track were already stored.

Symbol Meaning

Artist/track is not stored.
❤ Artist/track was already stored.

Storing the league or team

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Add to favorites"
5. "Add sports information"
6. Select the type of sport desired.
7. Select the desired team.

Activating/deactivating a notification

A notification can be displayed when a selected favorite is being played.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Press the button.

4. "Manage favorites" The stored Favorites are displayed.

5. "Activate alert" Set a check mark to activate notification for the selected Favorites. Remove the check mark to deactivate notification for the selected Favorites.

6. Select the desired Favorites.

Opening the Favorites

If an activated favorite is played back, the following message is displayed for approx. 20 seconds: "Favorite on air!".

To change to the played Favorites: Tap on the message on the Control Display. Or:

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Favorite alert"

Select the symbol while the message is shown.

The displayed favorite is played.

When the message disappears, the list of channels that is currently playing one of the stored Favorites can be displayed.

1. Move the Controller to the left.
2. "Category"
3. Select the Favorites list.

The channels that are currently playing a favorite are displayed.

1. Select the channel that you would like to change to.

Deleting Favorites

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Pres
4. "Manage favorites"

The stored Favorites are displayed.

1. Highlight the desired favorites.
2. Pres
3. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump

General information

Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Configure jump"

5. Select the desired region.

Activating/deactivating Traffic Jump

You must have reception in order to activate or deactivate.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Press the button.
4. "Configure jump"
5. "Jump to:"

Place a check mark to activate Traffic Jump.

Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available.

Remove the check mark to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Channel magazine

In the channel magazine, the current and subsequent program for each channel booked is displayed.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. SiriusXM program guide"

Automatic update

About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The update takes place automatically and may take several minutes.

System limits

- Reception may not be available in some situations, such as under certain environmental or topographical conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this.

• Graphical contents can be received under certain circumstances.
• The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages next to tall buildings or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference.

Stored stations

General information

Up to 40 stations can be stored.

Selecting a station

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.

Deleting a station

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Highlight the station you want to delete.
4. Press the button.
5. "Delete entry"

Audio

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Music tracks, audio books, and podcasts can be played back. Sound is played back through the vehicle loudspeakers.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following audio sources can be used:

Symbol Meaning

USB storage device.

Bluetooth audio.

USB storage device

playable formats

Popular audio formats such as MP3, AAC or WMA can be played.

Apple iPod/iPhone

The music search and playback of Apple iPod/iPhone are supported.

Audio player and storage media with USB port

Information on all music tracks, for instance artist, genre or track, as well as playback lists, are transmitted into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB storage device, file size, and number of tracks.

During the transfer, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

The information for approx. 10,000 tracks can be stored in the vehicle.

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management DRM cannot be played.

Selecting the USB storage device

Information on the USB port, refer to page 195.

1. Connecting USB storage devices to the USB port.
   The adapter cable supplied with the USB storage device would be ideal.
2. "Media/Radio"
3. "USB"
   Or:
   Select the name of the USB storage device.

Further playback descriptions, refer to page 233.

Bluetooth audio

General information

- Playback of music files on external devices such as audio devices or mobile phones via Bluetooth.

• The volume of the sound output depends on the device. If necessary, adjust the volume on the device.
• Up to four external devices can be connected to the vehicle.

Functional requirements

• Bluetooth device is connected to the vehicle.
• Bluetooth audio playback was activated.

Selecting the Bluetooth device

1. "Media/Radio"
2. Select the desired Bluetooth device from the list.

Further playback descriptions, refer to page 233.

If the Bluetooth device is not listed in the device list, Bluetooth audio playback may have not been activated. To activate Bluetooth audio playback, proceed as follows:

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Manage mobile devices"
3. Select the desired Bluetooth device.
4. "Bluetooth® audio"

Playback

General information

Once an audio source has been selected, information on playback appears on the Control Display.

Information available for the current track followed by the playback list is shown on the Control Display. Content and scope of the playback list depend on the type of the selected playback source and the search criteria applied.

For USB and Bluetooth devices, the selected playback list is displayed. This can be the result of a search or of a previously stored playback list.

Further functions are displayed by moving the Controller to the left. The scope of these functions depends on the selected audio source.

Depending on the supported Bluetooth version, some Bluetooth device functions may not be available when using the Central Information Display (CID). If necessary, the missing functions can be accessed directly on the device itself.

Selecting a track

Select the desired track from the playlist. Starting with the selected track, all tracks of the playback list are played.

Changing the track

On the radio:

Press the left or right button.

The previous or next track from the playlist is played.

Fast forward/reverse

On the radio:

Press and hold the left or right button.

Search criteria

General information

The possible search criteria depend on the selected audio source.

Searching for track information

The following search criteria refer to the data stored in the track information.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. Select the desired setting:

- "Search"

All the tracks containing the search string are displayed. Entering more characters will continue to narrow down the search results.

Tilt the Controller to the right to display the list of results.

- "Genres"

A list of all available genres is displayed.

Select a genre to display all respective artists.

- "Artists"

A list of all available artists is displayed.

Select an artist to display all respective albums and tracks.

- "Albums"

A list of all available albums is displayed.

Select an album to display all respective tracks.

- "Titles"

A list of all available tracks is displayed.

1. Select album, if needed.

2. Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

The search for artists and titles can also be selected directly.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Artists" or "Titles"

Tracks where the selected search criterion is not stored are summarized under "unknown". Tracks without track information can only be found via the directory structure.

Search playlists

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. "Playlists"

A list of all available playback lists is displayed.

1. Select the playback list.

2. Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the Control Display. A playback list is created from the search results.

Search audio books and podcasts

Depending on the USB storage device and equipment, separate audio book and podcast searches are possible.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. Select the desired setting:

- "Podcasts"

A list of all available podcasts is displayed.

- "Audio books"

A list of all available audio books is displayed.

1. Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the Control Display. A playback list is created from the search results.

Search directory structure

It is possible to search the USB storage devices via the directory structure.

The names of folders and tracks correspond to folder and file names. The folder and file names can deviate from the names in the track information.

1. Move the Controller to the left.
2. "Media search"
3. "Browse folder"
4. Change into a sub folder, if needed.

Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the Control Display. A playback list is created from the search results.

Random playback

Concept

The current playlist or all tracks of the selected audio source are played back in random order.

Select random

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Shuffle"

Telephone

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Telephone functions

General information

Mobile phones can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. Pair and connect the mobile phone with the vehicle, refer to page 46.

At high temperatures, the charge function of the mobile phone can be limited where appropriate and functions are no longer executed.

Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as this may lead to a malfunction.

When the mobile phone is used via the vehicle, refer to the owner's manual of the mobile phone.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is

a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Incoming call

If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise, only the phone number is displayed.

Accepting a call

Incoming calls can be answered in several ways.

– Via Central Information Display (CID):

Press the corresponding button on the steering wheel.

Rejecting a call

"Reject"

Ending a call

– Via Central Information Display (CID):

Press the corresponding button on the steering wheel.

Last calls

The last outgoing, missed, and incoming calls are transferred to the vehicle.

Displays

1. "Communication"
2. "Recent calls"
3. The 20 last calls are displayed.

Filtering call list

1. "Calls:"
2. Select the desired setting.

Selecting number from list

Select from list. Call is established via the mobile phone.

To cancel: "End call"

Active calls

Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button on the radio during the call, until the desired volume is reached. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic volume equalization

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "Microphone" or "Speakers"
6. To adjust: turn the Controller.
7. To store: press the Controller.

Dialing a number

1. "Communication"
2. "Dial number"
3. Enter the numbers.
4. Select the symbol.

Holding, resuming

An active call can be put on hold and resumed later on.

• "Hold/Resume" Call is put on hold.
• "Hold/Resume" Call is resumed.

Muting the microphone

When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.

"Microphone"

The muted microphone is automatically activated:

• When a new connection is established.
• When switching between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing

DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining access to network services or for controlling devices, for instance to make a remote inquiry of an answering machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose.

1. "Keypad dialing"
2. Enter DTMF code.

Calls with multiple parties

General information

You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party

If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal sounds where appropriate.

"Accept"

The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call

An additional call can be established while a call is active.

1. [Contacts]

2. Select new number.

The call is started and the first call is put on hold.

Switching between two calls, hold call

You can switch between two calls.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Resume"

The call on hold is resumed.

Establishing a conference call

Two calls can be connected to a single telephone conference call. The calls must be made from the same mobile phone.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Conference call"

Hands-free system

General information

Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands-free system

Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with standby state or the ignition switched on. The vehicle key must be located in the vehicle for this to work.

Depending on the mobile phone, the system automatically switches to the hands-free system.

If the system does not switch over automatically, follow the instructions on the display of the mobile phone. Refer also to the owner's manual of the mobile phone.

From the hands-free system to the mobile phone

Calls that are made on the hands-free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone.

Follow the instructions on the display of the mobile phone. Refer also to the owner's manual of the mobile phone.

Contacts

General information

Contacts from the mobile phone are transferred and displayed. Contact pictures can be displayed, if the mobile phone supports this function.

Displaying all contacts

1. "Communication"

2. "Contacts"

The contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, contact search and quick search are offered.

Contact search

Contact search is available with more than 30 contacts.

1. "Search"

2. Enter the letters.

The hits are displayed on the right side.

1. Move the Controller to the right.
2. Select the contact to display it.

Quick search in lists

Quick search is available starting from 30 contacts. All letters, for which there are entries, are displayed in alphabetical order on the left of the Control Display.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.

All letters, for which contacts are stored, are displayed on the left.

1. Select the first letter of the desired contact.

The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.

Sorting contacts

Contact names can be displayed in a different order. Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the contacts may differ from the selected sorting order.

1. Press the button.
2. "Sort contacts"
3. "Last name" or "First name"

Voice command response

A connected smartphone can be used via voice operation.

Activate voice command response on the smartphone for this purpose.

Button on the steering wheel

Function

Press the button for at least 3 seconds. Voice command response is activated on the smartphone.

The symbol indicates that the voice command response is active.

MINI Connected

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Teleservices

Concept

Teleservices are services that help to maintain vehicle mobility.

General information

The offering depends on the equipment version of the vehicle and the country-specific variant.

For further information on the available services, the vehicle manufacturer recommends contacting a service center or customer support.

Teleservices can comprise the following services:

• Service Request, refer to page 240.
• Teleservice Report, refer to page 241.
• Teleservice Battery Guard, refer to page 241.
• Your dealer's service center, refer to page 241.
• Roadside Assistance, refer to page 290.

Requirements

• Active MINI Connected contract or equipment version with intelligent emergency call.
• Cellular network reception.
• Ignition or standby state is switched on.

Service Request

Automatic Service Request

The Teleservice data on the vehicle's service notifications is sent automatically to the service center by MINI prior to the service deadline. If feasible, the service center will contact the customer about arranging a service appointment.

This way, the dealer's service center can plan the necessary work in advance. This shortens the duration of the service appointment.

Manual Service Request

Concept

Using a manually initiated Service Request, data on the vehicle's service notifications is directly sent by MINI to the service center. If feasible, the service center will contact the customer about arranging a service appointment.

General information

A Service Request can be started via a Check Control message, refer to page 114.

Carry out service registration via the Check Control message: "Service request".

Starting a Service Request

1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "Teleservice Call"

Last Service Request

Concept

The last Service Request, for instance the last report to the dealer's service center, can be displayed on the Control Display.

Displaying the last Service Request

Check to see when the last Service Request was transmitted.

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Teleservice Call"

Teleservice Report

Concept

Transmits technical data that is evaluated for the ongoing development of MINI products from the vehicle to MINI in regular intervals, if needed.

General information

The Teleservice Report is free of charge and is activated in vehicles that meet the following requirements:

• Certain technical requirements are met.
• Active MINI Connected contract.
• Equipped with intelligent emergency call.

Neither personal data nor position data is transmitted.

Teleservice Battery Guard

Concept

If the battery charge state falls below certain values, MINI will inform you or your dealer's service center directly as warranted or the next time the vehicle is started.

General information

If necessary and possible, the dealer's service center will contact you to arrange a service appointment.

The Battery Guard Teleservice is available on a country-specific basis and under the following conditions:

• Certain technical requirements are met.
• Active MINI Connected contract.
• To receive information from the Battery Guard Teleservice, your contact data must be stored in the MINI Connected customer portal.

Your dealer's service center

Concept

The preset service center is displayed. It is possible to contact the service center.

General information

To use Service Partner management in the vehicle, log in with the MINI Connected access data in the MINI Connected customer portal. In addition, your vehicle must be assigned to your account in the MINI Connected customer portal.

Displaying service centers

The service center that is currently assigned to the vehicle is displayed as a contact in the vehicle.

1. "MINI Connected" or "Communication"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "Your service center" or select service partner management if necessary.

The assigned service center is displayed along with all its contact information.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following functions are available in a contact:

- Call contact.

Updating MINI Assist

Concept

Starts the manual update of all services available in the vehicle.

Updating services

1. "MINI Connected"
2. Press the button.
3. "Update MINI Services"

Customer support

Concept

Contact customer support for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling customer support

1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "Customer support"

The customer support is displayed and a voice connection is established. If a voice connection is not established, dial the number manually.

Refueling

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to page 246, prior to refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Fuel cap

Opening

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.

Close-up of a car's side panel with a white circular arrow icon pointing left (no text or symbols)

1. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

Close-up of a car fuel nozzle with a white arrow pointing to the dial (no text or symbols visible)

1. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Close-up of a car's fuel nozzle and valve component with an arrow pointing to the valve (no text or symbols visible)

Closing

Warning

The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Pay attention that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.

Emergency unlocking

It may be necessary in certain situations to unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with an electrical fault.

Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the following when re-fueling

General information

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:

• Premature switching off.
• Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly after refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may light up.

Follow safety regulations posted at the gas station.

Safety information

NOTICE

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.

Fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Fuel recommendation

General information

Depending on the region, many gas stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.

Gasoline

General information

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling.

Ethanol should meet the following quality standards:

US: ASTM 4806-xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511-xx

xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

Safety information

NOTICE

Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel system and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic converter is permanently damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines:

• Leaded gasoline.
• Metallic additives, for instance manganese or iron.

Do not press the Start/Stop button after refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to M100.

NOTICE

Fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality can compromise engine function or cause engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality.

CAUTION

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Additionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled maintenance.

Recommended fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 91.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 93.

Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 89.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 91.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Tire inflation pressure

General information

The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure influence the following:

• The service life of the tires.
• Road safety.
• Driving comfort.
• Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning

A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and before a long trip.

Tire inflation pressure specifications

In the tire inflation pressure table

The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 249, contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following:

• Tire sizes of your vehicle.
• Maximum permitted driving speed.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information

Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation pressure increases with the tire temperature.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire inflation pressure.

The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table

The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same temperature as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.:

- Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.

- If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip.

1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the intended tire inflation pressure.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure

For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.

For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Checking the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and correct it as needed.

Tire pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h

For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 249, and adjust as necessary.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER, COOPER ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Diagram showing human silhouette icons and a car silhouette with a plus sign, likely representing a vehicle or transportation concept.

205/55 R 16 91

V A/S

225/45 R 17 91

V A/S

205/55 R 16 91 W

205/55 R 16 91

H M+S

225/45 R 17 91

H M+S

2.2 / 32

2.2 / 32

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
225/45 R 17 94 Y XL	2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
225/40 R 18 92 Y XL
225/40 ZR 18 92 Y XL
225/40 R 18 92 H XL A/S
195/60 R 16 89 H M+S
195/55 R 17 92 H XL M+S
225/40 R 18 92 V XL M+S
235/35 R 19 91 Y XL	2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38
205/45 R 18 90 H XL M+S
Emergency wheel	Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 125/70 R 17 98 M	4.2 / 60

COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
225/45 R 1791 V A/S225/45 R 1794 Y XL225/45 R 1791 H M+S	2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
225/40 R 18	2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38
92 H XL A/S
225/40 R 18
92 Y XL
225/40 ZR 18
92 Y XL
235/35 R 19
91 Y XL
195/55 R 17
92 H XL M+S
225/40 R 18
92 V XL M+S
205/45 R 18	2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39
90 H XL M+S
Emergency wheel	Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 125/70 R 17	4.2 / 60
98 M

JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
225/40 R 1892 H XL A/S225/40 R 1892 Y XL235/35 R 1991 Y XL225/40 R 1892 V XL M+S	2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38
205/45 R 1890 H XL M+S	2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

Warning

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 251, and adjust as necessary.

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER, COOPER ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
205/55 R 16 91 V A/S	2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
225/45 R 17 91 V A/S
205/55 R 16 91 W
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 94 Y XL
225/40 R 18 92 Y XL
225/40 ZR 18 92 Y XL

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

225/40 R 18 92H XL A/S	2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
195/60 R 16 89H M+S
195/55 R 17 92H XL M+S
225/40 R 18 92V XL M+S
235/35 R 19 91Y XL
205/45 R 18 90H XL M+S
Emergency wheel	Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 125/70 R 1798 M	4.2 / 60

COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
225/45 R 1791 V A/S	2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
225/45 R 1794 Y XL
225/45 R 1791 H M+S
225/40 R 1892 H XL A/S
225/40 R 1892 Y XL
225/40 ZR 1892 Y XL
235/35 R 1991 Y XL
195/55 R 1792 H XL M+S
225/40 R 1892 V XL M+S	3.2 / 46 3.2 / 46
205/45 R 1890 H XL M+S	3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44
Emergency wheel	Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 125/70 R 1798 M	4.2 / 60

JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
225/40 R 1892 H XL A/S225/40 R 1892 Y XL235/35 R 1991 Y XL	2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
225/40 R 1892 V XL M+S	3.2 / 46 3.2 / 46
205/45 R 1890 H XL M+S	3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44

Tire identification marks

Tire size

205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Maximum tire load

Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.

Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating - GAWR - on the certification label on the driver's door pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle's Gross Axle Weight Rating -

GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.

Speed letter

Designation Maximum speed

Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h

S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0120

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design

0120: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation

Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Manufacture date

You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT ... 0120 1st week 2020

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC - Run-flat tires

Run-flat tires, refer to page 257, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread

Summer tires

Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased risk of hydroplaning.

Winter tires

Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Abstract 3D rendering of interlocking geometric blocks with no visible text or symbols

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage

General information

Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more

likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions:

• Unusual vibrations.
• Unusual tire or running noises.
• Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by the following situations, for instance:

• Driving over curbs.
• Road damage.
• Tire inflation pressure too low.
• Vehicle overloading.
• Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

Warning

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning

Tires can become damaged by driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire

damage. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. If possible, avoid driving over objects or road conditions that may damage tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully.

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing

Have mounting and tire and wheel balancing carried out by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General information

You can ask the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for instance due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type.

Warning

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a negative impact on the vehicle's handling and on the function of a variety of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Braking System or DSC Dynamic Stability Control. There is a risk of accident. To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

Close-up of a weathered car tire with a star symbol on the side (no text or symbols present)

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

New tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

Warning

Retreaded tires can have different tire casing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

The manufacturer of the vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tires

Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they usually do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of view. The label is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tires

For your own safety, use only runflat tires. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rotating wheels between axles

Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs between the axles to achieve even

wear. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed.

Storing tires

Tire inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires

Concept

Run-flat tires permit continued driving under restricted conditions even in the event of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General information

The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire.

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for instance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Label

Close-up of a car tire with a visible logo on the wheel (no text or symbols beyond the logo)

The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety measures

• Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
• Switch on the hazard warning system.
• Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
• Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
• Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out-

side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

- If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Mobility System

Concept

With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside.

General information

• Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compressor and sealant container.
• Use of the Mobility System may be ineffective if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
• Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
• Do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire.
• Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel.
• The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM wheel electronics replaced at the next opportunity.
• The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Overview

Storage

The Mobility System is in a bag on the left side of the cargo area.

Sealant container

Diagram of a coiled cable with two directional arrows labeled 1 and 2 pointing to its ends (no text or symbols beyond labels)

• Sealant container, arrow 1.
• Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

Compressor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose

Safety measures

• Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
• Switch on the hazard warning system.
• Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
• Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
• Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
• If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during extended operation. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes.

Filling

1. Shake the sealant container.

3D rendered image of a cylindrical device with an upward arrow and vertical striped pattern on the side (no text or symbols)

1. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.

Simple diagram of a cable with a black cylindrical component, no text or symbols present

1. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, ensuring that it engages audibly.

Diagram showing a cable being inserted into a cylindrical device with a separate black box nearby (no text or symbols)

1. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container onto the tire valve of the non-working wheel.

Close-up of a car tire connected to a battery and cable, with an arrow pointing to the tire component (no text or symbols visible)

1. With the compressor switched off, insert the plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.

Close-up of a car tire connected to a battery and cable, with a white arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

Close-up of a black cylindrical device with a white arrow pointing to a small circular component, against a black background (no text or symbols visible)

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure

Checking

1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage.
   To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant container

1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant container from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached

1. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

Close-up of a car tire connected to a small electronic device with cables, against a black background (no text or symbols visible)

1. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

Close-up of a car tire connected to a small electronic device with a white arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

1. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
   If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached.

2. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.

3. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

4. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached

1. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx.
   5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.
   Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
   If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

Adjustment

1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

Close-up of a car tire connected to a small electronic device with cable, against a black background (no text or symbols visible)

1. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

Close-up of a car tire connected to a small electronic device with a white arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

1. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2.0 bar.

2. Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

3. Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the button on the compressor.

4. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.

5. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.

6. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 143.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 139.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System promptly.

Snow chains

General information

The manufacturer of the vehicle has determined certain wheels and tires to be suitable for operation on the vehicle.

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

With the mounting of snow chains on unsuitable tires, the snow chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only mount snow chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of snow chains.

Warning

Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage tires and vehicle components. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.

Fine-link snow chains

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable.

Information regarding suitable snow chains is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Use

Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size:

- 195/60 R 16.

- 195/55 R 17.

- 205/45 R 18.

Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General information

When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed immediately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure due to a flat tire.

If needed, the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

! DANGER

The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety measures are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine.

! DANGER

Supports such as wooden blocks under the vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle jack to bear weight. They have the potential to exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack.

Warning

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not designed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.

Warning

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-resistant surface.

Warning

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.

Warning

When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing.

Warning

A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the vehicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General information

The vehicle manufacturer recommends to additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Close-up of a car wheel rim mounted on a stand, with a metallic object partially visible below (no text or symbols)

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

Side-by-side comparison of a car wheel rim and its side profile, showing front and side views (no text or symbols)

If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suitable objects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction.

Lug bolt lock

Concept

The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding.

Overview

The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 280.

3D mechanical component diagram showing two parts with arrows indicating assembly or positioning (no text or symbols present)

• Lug bolt, arrow 1.
• Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing

1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug bolt.

Screwing on

1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screwing on the lug bolt.

Preparing the vehicle

- Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from traffic.

• Switch on the hazard warning system.
• Set the parking brake.
• Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P.
• As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
• Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
• If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an appropriate distance.
• Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
• Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

Side view of a car showing two white arrows pointing upward from the side of the wheel (no text or symbols present)

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the marked positions.

Jacking up the vehicle

Warning

Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

3D mechanical component diagram with labeled parts 1 and 2 (no text or symbols beyond labels)

Mechanical linkage diagram with labeled parts (1, 2), no readable text or symbols beyond labels

1. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.

Close-up of a mechanical component with internal cavities and mounting bracket (no visible text or symbols)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a triangular frame structure (no visible text or symbols)

1. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

3D rendered mechanical component with articulated arms and mounting base (no visible text or symbols)

3D rendered mechanical structure with articulated arms and joints, no visible text or symbols

1. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand.

2. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle beneath the jacking point.

Two identical diagrams showing a person performing a leg exercise with 90-degree angle annotations (no text or symbols present)

1. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.

同步电机 90°

Mechanical robotic arm with 90-degree angle标注 (no other text or symbols)

1. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is with the entire surface on the

ground and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.

Mounting a wheel

Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
   If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-wise pattern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.

After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, if necessary.
   The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the nearest dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

Emergency wheel

Concept

In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel can be used in place of the wheel with the defective tire. The emergency wheel is only intended for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel has been replaced.

General information

Mount one emergency wheel only.

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and correct it as needed.

Safety information

Warning

The emergency wheel has particular dimensions. When driving with an emergency wheel, changed driving properties may occur, for instance reduced lane stability when braking, longer braking distance, and changed self-steering properties in the limit area. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Overview

Interior view of a car trunk with a circular disc and battery pack (no visible text or symbols)

The emergency wheel and the wheel change tools are located in the cargo area under the cargo floor panel.

Removing the emergency wheel

1. Pull up and remove the cargo floor panel.
2. Unscrew the butterfly screw.
3. Remove the retaining plate or the cover.
4. Where applicable, remove the holder and the trailer hitch.
5. Remove the jacking point and the tool holder on the left next to the emergency wheel.
6. Slide the emergency wheel to the left and remove it.

Inserting the emergency wheel

1. Insert the emergency wheel on the left and slide it to the right.
2. Where applicable, mount the holder and the trailer hitch.
3. Attach the retaining plate or the cover.
4. Screw on and tighten the butterfly screw.
5. Insert and secure the jacking point and the tool holder on the left next to the emergency wheel.
6. Insert the cargo floor panel.

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

Technical diagram of a car engine compartment with numbered components and labeled parts

1 Filler neck for washer fluid

2 Vehicle identification number

3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

5 Jump-starting, negative terminal

6 Coolant reservoir

Hood

Safety information

Warning

Improperly executed work in the engine compartment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Have work in the engine compartment performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

Warning

There are protruding parts, for instance locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

Warning

An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.

Opening the hood

1. Pull lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

1. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.

Indicator/warning lights

When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Close-up of a car's grille and grille with a white arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols visible)

Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Engine oil

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The engine oil consumption is dependent on your driving style and driving conditions.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling by taking a detailed measurement.

The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for instance:

- Sporty driving style.

- Break-in of the engine.

- Idling of the engine.

- With use of engine oil types that are classified as not suitable.

Different Check Control messages appear, depending on the engine oil level.

Safety information

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Electronic oil measurement

General information

The electronic oil measurement has two measuring principles:

- Monitoring.

- Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, for instance when taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Monitoring

Concept

The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and can be shown on the Control Display.

If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

A red indicator light indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

Functional requirements

A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil level

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

System limits

When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, it may not be possible to calculate a measured value. In this case, the measured value for the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

Concept

The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle is stationary and displayed via a scale. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

General information

During the measurement, the idle speed is increased somewhat.

Functional requirements

- Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.

• Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed.
• Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
• Engine is running and is at operating temperature.

Performing a detailed measurement

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General information

Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message displayed in the instrument cluster.

Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to page 275.

Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition before adding engine oil.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Safety information

Warning

Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Overview

The oil filler neck is located in the engine compartment, refer to page 269.

Adding engine oil

1. Open the hood, refer to page 270.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.

Simple grayscale illustration of a circular object with a diagonal stripe and an arrow pointing upward (no text or symbols)

1. Add engine oil.
2. Close the lid.

Engine oil types to add

General information

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.

Safety information

NOTICE

Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use oil additives.

NOTICE

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of damage to property. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil rating.

Suitable engine oil types

Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

BMW Longlife-17 FE+.

Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added:

Oil rating

API SL.

API SM.

API SN.

Viscosity grades

When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil belongs to one of the following viscosity grades:

Viscosity grades

SAE 0W-20.

SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable oil ratings and viscosity grades of engine oils can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Engine oil change

NOTICE

Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. It is recommended that you do not exceed the service intervals indicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop change the engine oil.

MINI recommends

MINI Original Engine Oil.

Coolant

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of different colors. Observe the water - additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable additives is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

With the engine hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

Warning

Additives are harmful and incorrect additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives only.

Coolant level

Checking

There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 270.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

Close-up of a car engine compartment showing internal components and a circular arrow indicating a specific component (no text or symbols present)

1. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

2. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

max min

1. Close the lid.

Adding coolant

1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 270.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

Close-up of a mechanical engine compartment with a highlighted component (no visible text or symbols)

1. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
2. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
3. Close the lid.
4. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system provides service notifications and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of the maintenance system may vary according to the country version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS

Concept

Sensors and special algorithms take into account the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to calculate the need for maintenance.

The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

General information

Information on service notifications, refer to page 120, can be displayed on the Control Display.

Service data in the vehicle key

Information on the service notifications is continuously stored in the vehicle key. The service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle key with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Storage periods

Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.

If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Please consult your Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on the performance of service and maintenance work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis

General information

Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Remove any devices connected at the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicle's primary emissions system. Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle's emissions.

Emissions

- The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

- The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Vehicle tool kit

Interior view of a car showing the rear compartment of a vehicle with a white plastic tray and an arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols visible)

The bag containing the onboard vehicle tool kit is located beneath the cargo floor panel.

After use, secure the bag with the onboard vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades

1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

Close-up of a mechanical component with two directional arrows labeled 1 and 2 pointing to features (no text or symbols beyond arrows)

1. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper blade must engage audibly.
2. Fold down the wiper arm.

Replacing rear wiper blades

1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.

3D rendering of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating rotation or force direction (no text or symbols)

1. Push the wiper blade out of the fastening by continuing to turn it all the way.
2. Insert the new wiper blade by following the steps in reverse order. The wiper blade must engage audibly.
3. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbs

Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have appropriate work performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not been described here.

A spare light box is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 281.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to conventional lasers and are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 281.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

Warning

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.

Warning

Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Warning

Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.

Headlight glass

Condensation can form on the inside of the headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed.

If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance water droplets in the light, have the headlights checked.

Headlight setting

The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight adjustment was changed, have it checked and, if necessary, corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Front halogen lights, bulb replacement

Overview

Halogen headlights

1 2

1 Low beams/high beams
2 Turn signal

Low beams/high beams

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 281.

55-watt bulb, HB2.

1. Open the hood, refer to page 270.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow, and remove.

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with a white arrow indicating a component (no visible text or symbols)

1. Pull off the connector.

2. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down.

Close-up of a mechanical component with circular opening and internal mechanism (no visible text or symbols)

1. Remove the bulb from the headlight housing.

2. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

Turn signal

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 281.

24-watt bulb, PWY24W.

1. Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove.

Close-up of a car tire with two circular buttons and directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

1. Unscrew the inner cover counterclockwise, and remove it.

Close-up of a car wheel rim with a circular arrow indicating rotation or motion (no text or symbols)

1. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing; if needed, loosen it with small tilting movements if possible.

Close-up of a mechanical component with wiring and a circular housing (no visible text or symbols)

1. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
2. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

LED front lights, bulb replacement

All lights feature LED technology.

In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

LED front fog lights

These front fog lights are made using LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

1 2 3 4 1 2

1 Tail lights in split doors
2 Tail lights in bumpers
3 License plate light
4 Center brake light

Tail lights in split doors

Note the safety information on lights and bulbs, refer to page 281.

Overview

1 2 2 2 3 4

1 Turn signal
2 Tail lights
3 Rear fog light
4 Reversing lights

Turn signals

21-watt bulbs, P21W.

1. Open the split doors.
2. Remove left or right cover. If necessary, it is then possible to pry the cover off using a screwdriver or a similar plastic tool.

Close-up of a car door buckle switch with a white arrow pointing to the lock (no text or symbols visible)

1. Press the latches together upward, arrow 1, and remove the bulb holder. Loosen the plug connector, arrow 2, on the bulb holder.

Close-up of a car interior panel with numbered annotations pointing to internal components

1. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.

2. Press the nonworking bulb, arrow 1, gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

1 2 2

1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

Rear fog lights/reversing lights

21-watt bulbs, P21W.

1. Open the split doors.
2. Remove left or right cover.

Close-up of a car interior showing a white arrow pointing left, indicating a directional change or movement (no text or symbols present)

1. Press the latches together in the direction of the arrow, arrow 1, and remove the bulb holder.

Loosen the plug connector, arrow 2, on the bulb holder.

Diagram of car interior components with numbered labels pointing to specific parts

1. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.

2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

3. Arrow 2: rear fog lights.

4. Arrow 3: reversing light

1 2 3

1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

Tail lights in split doors, Union Jack

All lamps in the split doors feature LED technology.

In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tail lights in bumpers

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 281.

In addition, the tail lights in the bumper assume the functions of the brake light, tail light and turn signals, if the split doors are open.

Overview

Close-up of a car's rear door and side panel with numbered labels (1, 2), showing no readable text or symbols beyond labels.

1 Tail lights/brake lights/turn signal
2 Brake lights/turn signals

Tail lights/brake lights/turn signal 21-watt bulbs, P21W.

1. Press out cover below the tail light.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the wheel and door (no text or symbols visible)

1. Remove the screwdriver from the on-board vehicle tool kit.

2. Pull the screwdriver blade from the handle and place it on the recessed-head screw head in the bumper.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing a handle and keyhole with an arrow pointing to the handle (no text or symbols visible)

1. Attach the screw driver handle with the slot to the blade, arrow 1.

Close-up of a car's side panel with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating components

1. Loosen screw in the bumper, arrow 2.
2. Pull tail light from the bumper.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the front bumper and a white arrow pointing to a small object (no text or symbols visible)

1. Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise and remove nonworking bulb.

3D rendered mechanical component with directional arrows indicating motion or flow (no text or symbols)

1. To insert the new bulb and install the tail light, proceed in reverse order of removal. Make sure that the bulb holder sits tight in the tail light.

Central brake light and license plate lights

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 281.

The lights feature LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Side turn signal, bulb replacement

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 281.

Bulbs:

- With white lens: WY5W.

1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn signal lights are on the left and right next to the hinges of the hood.

Close-up of a mechanical component with visible parts and mounting holes (no text or symbols)

1. Loosen the nuts of the cover by hand or with the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 280, and remove the cover.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and a highlighted section with arrows (no text or symbols)

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a tool inserted, showing internal structure and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

1. Replace the bulb.

2. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Insert the nuts of the cover and press down.

Vehicle battery

General information

The battery is maintenance-free.

More information about the battery can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your vehicle. Information on compatible vehicle batteries is available at your dealer's service center.

Register the battery to the vehicle

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once the battery has been registered again, all comfort features will be available without restriction and any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear.

Charging the battery

General information

Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life.

A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light.

Charge the battery in the following situations:

• When the inspection glass on the top of the battery is black.
• When the take-off performance is insufficient.

The following circumstances can have a negative effect on the performance of the battery:

• Frequent short-distance drives.
• The vehicle is not used for more than a month.

Safety information

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

Charging the battery

Charge the battery only when the engine is off and via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 293, in the engine compartment.

Power failure

After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example:

• Memory function: store the positions again.
• Time: update.
• Date: update.

- Glass sunroof: initialize the system.

Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the filled battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Accessing the fuses

The fuses are located in the glove compartment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest door and side panel with a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is available on the Internet: www.mini.com/fusecard.

Where applicable, information on the fuse types and locations is also found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.

Replacing fuses

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop replace the fuses.

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hazard warning flashers

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

The button is located above the Control Display.

The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

Depending on the equipment version, the warning triangle is located in the cargo area or under the cargo floor panel.

First-aid kit

General information

Some of the articles have a limited service life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage

The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept

MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.

General information

In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition is sent to the vehicle manufacturer.

There are various ways of making contact.

- Via a Check Control message, refer to page 114.

- Calling with a mobile phone.

Requirements

- Active MINI Connected contract or equipment version with intelligent emergency call.

- Cellular network reception.

- The ignition is switched on.

Starting

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, support is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "MINI Connected"

2. "MINI Assist"

3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the Roadside Assistance of the manufacture is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice Diagnosis

Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically.

Teleservice Help

Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. Confirm Teleservice Help.

The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored for specific functions.

If this is not possible, further measures will be initiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will be informed.

Emergency Request

Intelligent emergency call

Concept

In case of an emergency, an Emergency Request can be triggered automatically by the system or manually.

General information

Only press the SOS button in an emergency. The Intelligent Assist system establishes a connection with the MINI Response Center.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.

Overview

Top-down view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and control knobs (no visible text or symbols)

SOS button in the roofliner

Functional requirements

• The ignition is switched on.
• The Assist system is functional.
• If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent emergency call: the SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated.

Automatic triggering

Under certain conditions, for instance if the airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is automatically initiated immediately after an

accident of corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Manual triggering

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green.
3. The LED is illuminated green when an Emergency Request has been initiated.
   If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been established.
4. The LED flashes green when a connection to the MINI Response Center has been established.

The MINI Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the MINI Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstances.

For this purpose, data that serves to determine the necessary rescue measures, for instance the current position of the vehicle when it can be determined, is transmitted to the MINI Response Center.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Response Center through the loudspeakers, the hands-free system, for instance, may be broken. However, the MINI Response Center may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the Emergency Request.

Jump-starting

General information

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Safety information

! DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Warning

If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order during connection.

NOTICE

In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no body contact occurs.

Preparation

1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

Close-up of a car engine bay with a white arrow pointing to a component on the hood (no visible text or symbols)

The starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive terminal.

Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a small circular feature (no visible text or symbols)

The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables

To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following procedure.

1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding

starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

1. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.

2. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

1. Let both engines run for several minutes.

2. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing

Safety information

Warning

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Steptronic transmission with driven front axle: transporting the vehicle

General information

The vehicle must not be towed if the front wheels are touching the ground.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a risk of damage to property. Have vehicle transported only with lifted front axle or on a loading platform.

Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 108.

Tow truck

Three grayscale line drawings of a flatbed truck with a crane, shown from top to bottom (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

• Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
• Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Steptronic transmission with ALL4: transporting the vehicle

General information

The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.

Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 108.

Tow truck

Diagram showing three types of car loading trucks with no text or symbols

The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

• Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
• Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Manual transmission

Towing or pushing the vehicle

A broken-down vehicle can be towed or pushed.

For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 105.

NOTICE

If manual unlocking of the parking brake is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or towed. There is a risk of damage to property. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

Follow the following instructions:

- Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn signals, and wipers may be unavailable.

- Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

- When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering.

- Larger steering wheel movements are required.

- The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response.

- Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.

- Do not exceed a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km.

Tow truck

With driven front axle

Three grayscale line drawings of a flatbed truck with different car positions (car, truck, and cab) against a black background, no text or symbols present.

Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
- Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

With ALL4

Three types of car loading trucks with diagonal lines indicating speed, no text or symbols present

Have your vehicle transported on a flatbed surface only

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of damage to property. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

• Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
• Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Towing other vehicles

General information

Switch on the hazard warning system, depending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.

Safety information

Warning

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incorrectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the following:

• Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners.
• The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope

Observe the following notes when using the tow rope:

• Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
• Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening.
• Check the fastening of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals.
• Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.
• Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km.
• When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

Tow fitting

General information

3D rendered image of a metallic hook with threaded end (no text or symbols)

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 280, are together in the cargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

• Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
• Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.
• Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
• Check the fastening of the tow fitting in regular intervals.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Side-by-side comparison of a car's front and side profiles, showing grille and dashboard details (no text or symbols)

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel.

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission.

Have the reasons for the starting difficulties corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Manual transmission

If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 292. If the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 88.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release

the pedal. After the engine starts, immediately press on the clutch pedal again.

1. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system.
2. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Care

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Washing the vehicle

General information

Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure washers, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure washer.

Distances and temperature

• Maximum temperature: 140 °F/60 °C.
• Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
• Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm.

Automatic vehicle washes

Safety information

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic washing systems or car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the following instructions:

• Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
• Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the chassis.
• Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
• Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors.
• With rod antenna: unscrew the rod antenna to avoid rod antenna breakage.
• Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper system.

Driving into a car wash with a manual transmission

In car washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 105.

Driving into a car wash with a Steptronic transmission

In car washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 108.

Some car washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a car wash

Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.

Start the engine, refer to page 89.

Headlights

Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the windows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General information

MINI recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care products are available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instructions on the container.

Vehicle paint

General information

Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your vehicle care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.

Matte finish

Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte finish.

Leather care

Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently because soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.

Upholstery material care

General information

Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open Velcro ^® fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro ^® fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 °F/60 °C. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disc.

After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry them. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with plenty of water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components

Environmental influences can cause surface soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing vehicle care products in order to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood components only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components

NOTICE

Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Safety belts

Warning

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles.

Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached

to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car's interior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

Displays/Screens

NOTICE

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a clean, anti-static microfiber cloth.

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must

be taken. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Technical data

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available

in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The technical data and specifications in the Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for instance due to the selected special equipment, country version or country-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-specific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for instance a roof an-

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for instance due to the selected special equipment, tires, load and chassis version.

MINI Clubman

Width with mirrors in/mm 79.4/2,018

Width without mirrors in/mm 70.9/1,800

Height in/mm 56.7/1,441

Length in/mm 168.5/4,281

Wheelbase in/mm 105.1/2,670

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.1/11.3

Weights

MINI Cooper Clubman

Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,255/1,930
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,321/1,960
Load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 939/426
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 952/432
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,172/985
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,227/1,010
Approved rear axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,194/995
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,194/995

MINI Cooper S Clubman

Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,266/1,935
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,343/1,970
Load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 893/405
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 944/428
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,249/1,020
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,337/1,060
Approved rear axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,138/970
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,172/985

MINI Cooper Clubman ALL4

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,431/2,010

Load lbs/kg 871/395

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,304/1,045

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,238/1,015

MINI Cooper S Clubman ALL4

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,519/2,050

Load lbs/kg 922/418

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,370/1,075

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,260/1,025

MINI John Cooper Works Clubman ALL4

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,564/2,070

Load lbs/kg 917/416

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,414/1,095

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,271/1,030

Capacities

MINI Clubman

Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 13.2/50.0

Observe further information on fuel quality, refer to page 246.

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

The following chapters were updated in the printed version of the Owner's Manual after the editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:

• Notes: notes: own safety: maintenance.
• Quick Reference Guide: on the road: refueling stop: topping up the engine oil.
• Driving tips: observe when driving: driving on a race track.
• Mobility: engine oil: topping up the engine oil.
• Mobility: coolant: coolant level.
• Mobility: preventive maintenance: MINI maintenance system.
• Mobility: preventive maintenance: Condition Based Service CBS.
• Mobility: preventive maintenance: Maintenance Manual and Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

License Texts and Certifications

Headunit

Brazil

ANATEL

European Union: Declaration of Conformity

Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc. declares that the radio equipment type BIS01 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Technical information

Frequency Band: 2.5 GHz

Output Power : 8 dBm

Manufacturer and Address

Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics, Inc.

Address: 20-1, Yoshima Industrial Park, Iwaki, Fukushima 970-1192 Japan

Phone: [phone]

Български

Hereby, Alpine Electronics declares that the radio equipment type BIS01 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Español

Symbolic logo with a lightning bolt inside a circle and a square containing the letter 'R'

Mexico

NOM NYCE

Russia, Belarus, Kazakhstan

[EAC]

Abstract geometric logo design with stylized letter K (no text or symbols)

Low Power radio frequency electric machinery was qualified by Type Approval, not get permission from authority; the company, business or user can't arbitrarily change frequency, increase power or modify feature or function of original design.

2.

Use of low power radio frequency electric machinery can't affect flight safety and interfere with legal communication; once discover the interfered phenomenon, it should stop immediately and improve to no interference and then could continue to use.

The preceding legal communication is radio communication which follows Telecommunication Act to operate.

Low power radio frequency electric machinery must tolerate interference from legal communication or electric machinery apparatus of industry, science and medical radiation.

USA, Canada

USA (FCC) and Canada (IC)

Register model name:BIS01

Product code: RB00010A

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). (②)

Information regarding Open Source Software Licenses

The “IwIP – A Lightweight TCP/IP stack” included in some products is licensed under the “BSD licence”. A copy of that license in the English original version with a copy-

right notice, a disclaimer of warranty, and an exclusion of liability is included below. Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Swedish Institute of Computer Science. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Remote Control

Mexico

NOM NYCE

COFETEL: RLVBHEID13-0912

IFETEL: RLVBHEID18-1287

Marca: Hella

Modelo (s): IDGNG1

FCC § 15.19 Labelling requirements

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC § 15.21 Information to user

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

IC: 2694A-IDGNG1

IC: 2694A-IDGNG1

FCC § 15.19 Labelling requirements

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC § 15.21 Information to user

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Canada

IC: 7812D-TIS07

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

USA

FCC ID: KR5TIS-07

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Transmitter/Receiver

Mexico

IFETEL: RLVCOA213-1447

A2C35029700

Continental Automotive GmbH

Siemensstrasse 12

93055 Regensburg

Germany

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Everything from A to Z

Index

A

ABS Antilock Braking System 155

Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 112

Accessories and parts 10

ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 160

Activated-charcoal filter 187

Activation times, parked-car ventilation 188

Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based cruise control 160

Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 146

Adaptive chassis 157

Additives, engine oil types 274

Adjusting menu contents, Central Information Display (CID) 40

Adjustments, steering wheel 81

Airbags 135

Airbags, indicator and warning light 137

Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 182, 185

Air conditioner 181

Air conditioning, climate 182, 184

Air distribution, manual 182, 186

Air drying, see Air conditioning 182, 184

Air flow, air conditioner 182

Air flow, automatic climate control 186

Air pressure, tires 248

Air vents, see Ventilation 187

Alarm system 64

Alarm triggering 64

Alarm, unintentional 66

ALL4 157

All-season tires, see Winter tires 257

All-wheel drive, see ALL4 157

AM/FM station 224

Antifreeze, washer fluid 103

Antilock Braking System ABS 155

Anti-slip control, see DSC 155

Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 265

Approach control warning with city light braking function 147

Approved axle load 305

Ash tray 194

Assistance when driving off 158

Assistance with breakdown 290

Audio 232

Audio playback, Bluetooth 232

Audio playback, pause 220

AUTO intensity 185

Automatic climate control 183

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 80

Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger airbags 137

Automatic headlight control 130

Automatic locking 64

Automatic recirculated-air control 185

Automatic Service Request 240

Automatic transmission with Steptronic 105

Automatic unlocking 64

Automatic vehicle wash 299

AUTO program, automatic climate control 185

AUTO program, intensity 185

Auto Start/Stop function 91

Auto washing 299

Average consumption 124

Average speed 124

Axle loads, weights 305

B

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 72, 73

Backrest, seats 71

Balance, sound settings 222

Band-aids, see First-aid kit 290

Bass, sound settings 222

Battery, disposing of 289

Battery Guard, Teleservice 241

Battery, vehicle 288

Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 293

Belts, safety belts 74

Beverage holder, cup holder 199

Blocking, power window 68

Bluetooth audio 232

Bluetooth connection 46

Bonus range, GREEN Mode 216

Bottle holder, see Cup holder 199

Brake assistant 155

Brake discs, break-in 208

Brake pads, break-in 208

Braking, information 210

Breakdown assistance 290

Breakdown, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 143

Breaking in 208

Brightness of Control Display 43

Bulb replacement 281

Bulb replacement, front 282, 283

Bulb replacement, rear 284

Bulb replacement, side 287

Bulbs and lights 281

Button, SOS 291

Button, Start/Stop 88

Bypassing, see Jump-starting 292

C

California Proposition 65 Warning 10

Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelligent Safety 146

Camera-based cruise control 160

Camera lenses, care 302

Camera, rearview camera 173

Can holder, see Cup holder 199

Care, displays 302

Care, light-alloy wheels 301

Care, vehicle 300

Care, washing the vehicle 299

Cargo area 201

Cargo area, adapting size 206

Cargo area door, see Split doors 61

Cargo area, enlarging 204

Cargo area, loading 201

Cargo area, storage compartments 203

Cargo cover 203

Cargo position, rear seat backrest 204

Cargo, stowing and securing 201

Cargo straps 202

Carpet, care 302

Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas system 209

CBS Condition Based Service 278

Center armrest 198

Center console 34

Central Information Display (CID) 36

Central Information Display (CID), see Control Display 37

Central instrument cluster, LED ring 127

Central locking system, unlocking, from inside 57

Central screen, see Control Display 37

Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 9

Changing parts 280

Changing wheels 263

Changing, wheels and tires 256

Chassis number, see Vehicle identification number 15

Check Control 114

Checking the oil level electronically 272

Check oil level 272

Children, seating position 82

Children, transporting safely 82

Child restraint system 82

Child restraint system LATCH 85

Child restraint systems, mounting 83

Child safety locks 87

Child seat, mounting 83

Child seats 82

Chrome parts, care 301

Cigarette lighter 194

Cleaning, displays 302

Clearance, water 210

Climate control 181, 183

Clothes hooks 199

Coasting 217

Coasting with engine decoupled, coasting 217

Coasting with idling engine 217

Combination switch, see Turn signals 95

Combi switch, see Wiper system 96, 100

Comfort Access 58

Communication 236

Compartments in the doors 198

Compass 192

Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 46

Compressor 258

Computer, see Onboard Computer 123

Condensation on windows 186

Condensation under the vehicle 211

Condition Based Service CBS 278

Conference, see Calls with multiple parties 237

Configuring driving program 158

Confirmation signal 64

Connecting device 45

Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 194

Connections 45

Consumption, see Average consumption 124

Consumption, see Current consumption 120

Contacts 238

Continued driving with a flat tire 142, 145

Control Display 37

Controller 38

Control systems, driving stability 155

Convenient closing 54

Convenient opening 53

Cooling, maximum 184

Cornering light 131

Corrosion on brake discs 211

Cosmetic mirror 194

Coupling, see Pairing 45

Courtesy lights during unlocking 53

Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 54

Cruise control 167

Cruise control, active 160

Cruise control with distance control, see Camera-based cruise control 160

Cruise control without distance control, see Cruise control 167

Cruising range 119

Cup holder 199

Current consumption 120

Customer support 242

D

Damage, tires 255

Data memory 11

Data protection, settings 45

Data, technical 304

Date 42

Date, display 119

Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation 150

Daytime running lights 131

DCC, see Cruise control 167

Defrosting, see Defrosting the windows 183

Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 186

Defrosting the windows 183

Deleting personal data 45

Deletion of personal data 45

Device list 45

Digital clock 119

Digital compass 192

Digital radio, see HD Radio reception 225

Dimensions 304

Dimmable exterior mirrors 80

Dimmable interior mirror 81

Direction indicator, see Turn signals 95

Display, date 119

Display, electronic, instrument cluster 114

Display, engine temperature 125

Display, GREEN Mode 214

Display, iDrive 36

Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 133

Displays 113

Displays, care 302

Disposal, coolant 277

Disposal, vehicle battery 289

Distance control, see PDC 169

Drive-off assistant 158

Drive-off assistant, see DSC 155

Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 146

Driver profiles 62

Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driving Modes switch 157

Driving Excitement, SPORT 126

Driving instructions, breaking in 208

Driving mode, GREEN 214

Driving modes 157

Driving notes, general 209

Driving notes, things to remember when driving 208

Driving on racetracks 212

Driving stability control systems 155

Driving through water 210

Driving tip, GREEN tip 216

Driving tips 209

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 155

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 156

Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chassis 157

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 155

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 156

E

Easy Opener 60

Electronic displays, instrument cluster 114

Electronic oil measurement 272

Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 155

Emergency Request 291

Emergency service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 290

Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 245

Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 111

Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 267

Energy control 120

Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 91

Engine, automatic switch-off 91

Engine compartment 269

Engine compartment, working in 270

Engine coolant 276

Engine idling when driving, coasting 217

Engine oil 272

Engine oil, adding 273

Engine oil change 275

Engine oil filler neck 273

Engine oil types to add 274

Engine start, see Jump-starting 292

Engine start, see Starting the engine 89

Engine stop 90

Engine temperature, display 125

Entering a vehicle wash 299

Entertainment, control elements 220

Entertainment source, changing 220

Equipment, interior 189

Error displays, see Check Control 114

ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 155

Exchanging, wheels and tires 256

Exhaust gas system 209

Exiting a vehicle wash 299

Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 80

Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 80

Exterior mirrors 79

Exterior mirrors, malfunction 80

External start 292

External temperature display 119

External temperature warning 119

Eyes for securing cargo 202

F

Fader, sound settings 222

Failure message, see Check Control 114

False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 66

Fan, see Air flow 182, 186

Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 74

Filler neck for engine oil 273

Filter, see Microfilter 183

Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter 187

Fine wood, care 301

First-aid kit 290

Flat tire, changing wheels 263

Flat Tire Monitor TPM 143

Flat tire, repairing 258

Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 139

Flat tire, warning light 140, 144

Flooding, driving through 210

Floor carpet, care 302

Floor mats, care 302

FM/AM station 224

Fogged up windows 183

Fold-away position, windshield wipers 99, 102

Foot brake 210

For Your Own Safety 9

Front airbags 135

Front fog lights 132

Front fog lights, LED, bulb replacement 283

Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deactivation 137

Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 138

Front seats 71

Fuel 246

Fuel cap 244

Fuel filler flap 244

Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 245

Fuel gauge 118

Fuel quality 246

Fuel recommendation 246

Fuel, tank capacity 306

Fuse 289

G

Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 189

Gasoline 246

Gear shift indicator 121

General driving notes 209

General settings 42

Glare shield 194

Glass sunroof, initialize the system 70

Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-roof 68

Glove compartment 197

Gong, volume equalization 222

GPS geolocation, vehicle position 43

GREEN bonus range 216

GREEN Mode 214

GREEN - program, driving dynamics 157

GREEN tip, driving tip 216

Gross vehicle weight, approved 305

Ground clearance 211

H

Halogen headlights 282

Handbrake, see Parking brake 93

Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 190

Hands-free system 238

Hazard warning flashers 290

HD Radio 225

Head airbag 136

Headlight control, automatic 130

Headlight flasher 96

Headlight glass 282

Headlights, care 300

Head restraints and seats 71

Head restraints, front 76

Head restraints, rear 77

Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 201

High-beam Assistant 131

High beams 96

High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assistant 131

Hills 210

Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 158

Holder for beverages 199

HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 189

Homepage, see Internet 8

Hood 270

Horn 32

Hot exhaust gas system 209

Hotline, see Customer support 242

Hydroplaning 209

I

Ice warning, see External temperature warning 119

Icy roads, see External temperature warning 119

Identification marks, tires 253

Identification number, see Vehicle identification number 15

Ignition off 88

Ignition on 88

Illuminated ring, central instrument cluster 127

Indication of a flat tire 140, 144

Indicator and warning lights, see Check Control 114

Indicator light, see Check Control 114

Individual air distribution 182, 186

Individual settings, see Driver profiles 62

Inflation pressure, tires 248

Inflation pressure warning, tires 143

Info Display 114

Information 8

Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 139

Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 144

Input, iDrive 36

Instrument cluster 113

Instrument cluster, electronic displays 114

Instrument lighting 133

Integrated key 56

Integrated Universal Remote Control 189

Intelligent emergency call 291

Intelligent Safety 146

Intended use 9

Intensity, AUTO program 185

Interior equipment 189

Interior lights 133

Interior lights during unlocking 53

Interior lights with the vehicle locked 54

Interior mirror 79

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 81

Interior mirror, compass 192

Interior mirror, manually dimmable 80

Interior motion sensor 66

Internet site 8

Interval display, service notifications 120 Interval mode 97, 100

In the vicinity of the center console 34

In the vicinity of the roofliner 35

In the vicinity of the steering wheel 32

iPod/iPhone 232

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 265

Jam protection system, glass sunroof 70

Jam protection system, windows 67

Jump-starting 292

K

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 58

Key, see Integrated key 56

Key, see Vehicle key 52

Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 108

Knee airbag 136

L

Label on recommended tires 256

Label, runflat tires 257

Language, set on Control Display 42

Lashing eyes 202

LATCH child restraint fixing system 85

Launch Control 112

Leather care 301

LED ring, central instrument cluster 127

LEDs, light-emitting diodes 281

Letters and numbers, entering 36

Light 129

Light-alloy wheels, care 301

Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 281

Lighter 194

Lighting 129

Light replacement 281

Light replacement, front 282, 283

Light replacement, rear 284

Light replacement, side 287

Lights and bulbs 281

Light switch 129

List of all messages 44

Load 202

Loading 201

Loading position 204

Location, vehicle position 43

Locking, automatic 64

Locking, from inside 57

Locking, see Opening and Closing 52

Locking, settings 63

Low beams 129

Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assistant 131

Lower back support 73

Lower back support, mechanical 72

Lug bolt lock 265

Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage rack 211

Lumbar support 73

Lumbar support, mechanical 72

M

Maintenance 278

Maintenance requirements 278

Maintenance, service notifications 120

Maintenance system, MINI 278

Make-up mirror 194

Malfunction displays, see Check Control 114

Manual air flow 182

Manual brake, see Parking brake 93

Manual control, air distribution 182, 186

Manual control, air flow 186

Manual mode, transmission 109

Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Control 170

Manual operation, rearview camera 173

Manual transmission 104

Manufacturer of the MINI 9

Matt paint, care 300

Maximum cooling 184

Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit Info 122

Maximum speed, winter tires 257

Measuring units 43

Mechanical key 56

Media of the Owner's Manual 51

Medical kit 290

Memory function 78

Menu in instrument cluster 123

Menus, Central Information Display (CID) 39

Messages 44

Messages, see Check Control 114

Microfilter 183, 187

Microphone, muting 237

MID - program, driving dynamics 157

MINI driving modes 157

MINI logo projection during unlocking 53

MINI maintenance system 278

Minimum tread, tires 255

MINI Roadside Assistance 290

MINI Teleservices 240

Mirrors 79

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle 209

Mobile phone 236

Mobile phone, connecting 45

Mobile phone, operation 236

Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 290

Mobility System 258

Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Safety 9

Moisture in headlight 282

Monitor, see Control Display 37

Mounting of child restraint systems 83

MP3 player, see Audio 232

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32

N

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints front 76

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints rear 77

Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy rims 301

New wheels and tires 256

No-touch opening the split doors 60

0

OBD Onboard Diagnosis 279

Obstacle marking, rearview camera 174

Octane rating, see Recommended fuel grade 247

Odometer 118

Oil 272

Oil, adding 273

Oil change 275

Oil filler neck 273

Oil service interval, service notifications 120

Oil types to add, engine 274

Onboard Computer 123

Onboard Diagnosis OBD 279

Onboard literature, printed 51

Onboard vehicle tool kit 280

On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assistance 290

Opening and Closing 52

Opening, from inside 57

Operating concept Central Information Display (CID) operating concept 36

Operating menus, Central Information Display (CID) 36

Operation via the Controller 39

Optional equipment 9

Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air control 185

Owner's Manual, printed 51

P

Paint, car care 300

Panic alarm, see Panic mode 65

Panic mode 65

Panoramic glass sunroof 68

Parallel parking assistant 175

Park Distance Control PDC 169

Parked-car ventilation 187

Parked vehicle, condensation 211

Parking aid, see PDC 169

Parking assistant 175

Parking brake 93

Parking lights 129

Parts and accessories 10

Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 80

Pathway lighting 130

Pathway lines, rearview camera 174

Pause, audio playback 220

PDC Park Distance Control 169

Performance Control 157

Personal profile, see Driver profiles 62

Phone conference, see Calls with multiple parties 237

Phone, connecting 45

Plastic, care 302

PostCrash - iBrake 153

Power failure 288

Power windows 66

Pressure, tires 248

Pressure warning, tires 143

Printed onboard literature 51

Profiles, see Driver profiles 62

Programmable memory buttons, Central Information Display (CID) 41

Protective function, glass sunroof 70

Protective function, windows 67

Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 38

R

Racetrack operation 212

Radio 224

Radio, adjusting the volume 220

Radio, control elements 220

Radio Data System RDS 224

Radio, muting 220

Radio-ready state 89

Radio, tone settings 222

Rain sensor 97, 100

Ratchet straps 202

RDS Radio Data System 224

Rear lights 284

Rear seat backrests, folding down 204

Rearview camera 172

Rear-view mirrors, exterior 79

Rear window defroster 183, 186

Rear window wiper, operation 98, 102

Recirculated-air filter 187

Recirculated-air mode 182, 185

Recommended fuel grade 247

Recommended tire brands 256

Refueling 244

Remaining range 119

Remote control, universal 189

Replacing parts 280

Replacing the battery, vehicle key 55

Replacing, wheels and tires 256

Reporting safety malfunctions 15

RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise control 160

RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 167

Reserve warning, see Range 119

Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 139

Retreaded tires 257

Roadside parking lights 130

Rolling code hand-held transmitter 190

RON recommended fuel grade 247

Roofliner 35

Roof-mounted luggage rack 211

RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat tires 257

Rubber components, care 301

Runflat tires 257

S

Safe braking 210

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat 76

Safety belts 74

Safety belts, care 302

Safety locks, doors, and windows 87

Safety switch, windows 68

Safety systems, airbags 135

Satellite radio 226

Saving fuel 213

Screens, care 302

Screen, see Control Display 37

Screwdriver 280

Sealant, see Mobility System 258

Seat heating, front 74

Seating position for children 82

Seats and head restraints 71

Seats, front 71

Securing cargo 201

Selection list in instrument cluster 123

Sensors, care 302

Service and warranty 11

Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assistance 290

Service notifications, display 120

Service Request 241

Service requirements, Condition Based Service CBS 278

Servotronic 159

SET button, camera-based cruise control 160

SET button, Cruise Control 167

Settings, general 42

Settings, locking/unlocking 63

Settings, mirrors 79

Settings, seats and head restraints 71

Shift paddles on the steering wheel 110

Side airbag 135

Signaling, horn 32

Signals when unlocking 64

Sitting safely 71

Sizes, see Dimensions 304

Slide/tilt glass roof 68

Smartphone, connecting 45

Smartphone, operation 236

Snow chains 262

Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 279

Sockets, electrical devices 194

SOS button 291

Sound output 220

Source, changing, see Entertainment source, changing 220

Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 267

Speed, average 124

Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 122

Speed Limit Info 122

Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 125

Speed Volume, volume equalization 222

Speed warning 126

Split doors 61

Split doors, opening with no-touch activation 60

Split doors via vehicle key 54

Sport displays 126

SPORT program, driving dynamics 158

Sport program, transmission 109

Stability control systems 155

Standard equipment 9

Start/stop, automatic function 91

Start/Stop button 88

Starting the engine 89

Station, AM/FM 224

Station, renaming 225

Stations, stored 231

Station, storing 224

Status information, Central Information Display (CID) 37

Status of Owner's Manual 9

Status, vehicle 128

Steering assistance 159

Steering column adjustment 81

Steering wheel, adjusting 81

Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic transmission 105

Steptronic Sport transmission with double clutch, see Steptronic transmission 105

Steptronic transmission 105

Steptronic transmission with double clutch, see Steptronic transmission 105

Stopping the engine 90

Storage compartments 197

Storage, tires 257

Store Mirror position, see Memory function 78

Store seat position, see Memory function 78

Storing the vehicle 302

Stowing and securing cargo 201

Suitable devices 46

Suitable mobile phones 46

Summer tires, tread 255

Sun visor 194

Supplementary Owner's Manuals 51

Supplementary text message 118

Switch for driving dynamics 157

Switching calls, see Calls with multiple parties 237

Switch, see Cockpit 32

Symbols 8

T

Tachometer 118

Tailgate, see Split doors 61

Tail lights 284

Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 9

Technical data 304

Telephone 236

Telephone conference, see Calls with multiple parties 237

Telephone, operation 236

Teleservice Battery Guard 241

Teleservice Report 241

Teleservices 240

Temperature, air conditioner 181

Temperature, automatic climate control 184

Temperature display for external temperature 119

Temperature, engine 125

Terminal, starting aid 293

Text message, see Check Control messages 118

Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 64

Thigh support 74

Through-loading system 204

Tilt alarm sensor 66

Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 80

Time 42

Tire damage 255

Tire identification marks 253

Tire inflation pressure 248

Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see TPM 143

Tire pressure 248

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 139

Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 258

Tires 248

Tires, changing 256

Tire sealant, see Mobility System 258

Tires, runflat 257

Tire tread 255

Tone 222

Tools 280

Total vehicle weight 305

Towing 293

Tow-starting 293

TPM Flat Tire Monitor 143

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 139

Traction control 156

TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control, DTC 156

Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 111

Transmission lock, releasing manually 111

Transmission, manual transmission 104

Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 105

Transporting children safely 82

Tread, tires 255

Treble, sound settings 222

Trip computer 125

Triple turn signal activation 95

Trip odometer 118

Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 118

Trunk, see Cargo area 201

Turning radius lines, rearview camera 174

Turn signal, front 282, 283

Turn signal, indicator light 117

Turn signal, side 287

Turn signals, operation 95

Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 284

U

Unintentional alarm 66

Units, see Measuring units 43

Universal remote control 189

Unlocking, automatic 64

Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 52

Unlocking, settings 63

Updates made after the editorial deadline 9

Upholstery care 301

USB connection 48

USB port, position in vehicle 195

USB storage device 232

Used battery, disposing of 289

Use, intended 9

V

Vanity mirror 194

Vehicle battery 288

Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assistance 290

Vehicle, breaking in 208

Vehicle care 300

Vehicle care products 300

Vehicle features and options 9

Vehicle identification number 15

Vehicle jack 265

Vehicle key, additional 55

Vehicle key, loss 55

Vehicle key, malfunction 55

Vehicle key, opening/closing 52

Vehicle key, replacing the battery 55

Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 52

Vehicle paint, care 300

Vehicle position, vehicle location 43

Vehicle status 128

Vehicle storage 302

Vehicle wash 299

Vehicle wash, automatic 299

Vehicle, washing 299

Ventilation 187

Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 187

VIN, see Vehicle identification number 15

Voice command response, smartphone 239

Volume equalization 222

W

Warning and indicator lights, see Check Control 114

Warning displays, see Check Control 114

Warning messages, see Check Control 114

Warning triangle 290

Warranty 9

Washer fluid 103

Washer nozzles, windshield 98, 102

Washing the vehicle 299

Water on roads 210

Weights 305

Welcome lights 130

Welcome lights during unlocking 53

Wheel base, vehicle 304

Wheels 248

Wheels, changing 256

Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 139

Windows, powered 66

Windshield cleaning system 96, 100

Windshield defroster 183, 186

Windshield washer fluid 103

Windshield washer nozzles 98, 102

Windshield wipers, fold-away position 99, 102

Windshield wipers, see Wiper system 96, 100

Winter storage, care 302

Winter tires, suitable tires 257

Winter tires, tread 255

Wiper blades, replacing 280

Wiper fluid 103

Wiper system 96, 100

Wood, care 301

Word match concept, navigation 36

Wrench 280

Y

Your dealer's service center 241

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California:

California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-high-way motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app. Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

Download on the App Store

GET IT ON Google Play

Exterior view of a wooden building with concrete steps and cobblestone pavement (no signage or text visible)

01405A02527 ue